1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1444 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1453 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1456 selects the whole document.
1459 \begin_layout Section
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset Index idx
1474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1483 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1491 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in LyX.
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1619 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1659 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1731 \begin_layout Subsection
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1743 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1744 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1745 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1757 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1764 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1769 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1773 \begin_layout Standard
1774 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1775 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1776 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1777 dialog and to modify the citation.
1780 \begin_layout Standard
1781 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1783 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1784 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1792 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1797 you further to control the display.
1802 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1803 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1809 option keeps it in the current view state.
1810 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1811 \begin_inset space ~
1814 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1815 \begin_inset space ~
1818 3, the subsections of sections
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1822 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1827 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1832 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1842 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1845 \begin_layout Standard
1847 \begin_inset space \space{}
1851 \begin_inset Graphics
1852 filename ../images/reload.png
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1861 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1864 \begin_inset space \space{}
1868 \begin_inset Graphics
1869 filename ../images/down.png
1871 groupId toolbarbuttons
1876 \begin_inset space ~
1880 \begin_inset space \space{}
1884 \begin_inset Graphics
1885 filename ../images/up.png
1887 groupId toolbarbuttons
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1895 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1896 So, for example, you can move section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1904 2.4 or after section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 \begin_inset Graphics
1912 filename ../images/promote.png
1914 groupId toolbarbuttons
1919 \begin_inset Graphics
1920 filename ../images/demote.png
1922 groupId toolbarbuttons
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Section
1951 Input/Word Completion
1952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1954 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1969 \begin_inset Index idx
1972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_layout Standard
2004 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2006 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2007 is used to propose completions.
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2013 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2018 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2025 \begin_inset space ~
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2034 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2043 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2044 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2048 \begin_inset space ~
2054 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2055 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2058 \begin_layout Standard
2059 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2060 are completions available.
2065 key to accept a proposed completion.
2066 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2067 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2068 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2075 \begin_layout Standard
2076 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2077 ing options for text.
2078 The special math option
2082 enables characters to be composed.
2083 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2084 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2087 , you can then input the characters
2088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2099 to a formula to get it.
2100 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2101 of the math toolbar.
2102 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2106 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2107 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2116 \begin_layout Section
2118 \begin_inset Index idx
2121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_inset Index idx
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2194 \begin_layout Standard
2195 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2208 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2210 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2214 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2221 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2228 \begin_layout Standard
2232 \begin_inset space ~
2240 \begin_inset space ~
2261 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2265 \begin_layout Labeling
2266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2270 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2271 LatexCommand nomenclature
2273 description "Tabulator key"
2279 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2280 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2281 \begin_inset space ~
2285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2287 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2294 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2298 , especially section
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2305 reference "sub:Lists"
2311 If you are still confused, look in the
2316 \begin_inset Newline newline
2323 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2324 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2328 \begin_layout Labeling
2329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2333 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2334 LatexCommand nomenclature
2336 description "Escape key"
2343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2350 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2351 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2354 \begin_layout Labeling
2355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2361 \begin_inset space ~
2365 \begin_inset space ~
2372 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2373 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are three modifier keys:
2381 \begin_layout Labeling
2382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2400 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2401 LatexCommand nomenclature
2403 description "Control key"
2407 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2408 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2412 \begin_layout Itemize
2421 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2424 \begin_layout Itemize
2433 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2436 \begin_layout Itemize
2445 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2469 LatexCommand nomenclature
2471 description "Shift key"
2475 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2476 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2479 \begin_layout Labeling
2480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2498 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2499 LatexCommand nomenclature
2501 description "Alt or Meta key"
2505 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2506 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2507 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2513 \begin_inset Newline newline
2516 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2518 menu accelerator keys
2521 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2522 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2526 \begin_layout Standard
2527 For example, the sequence
2528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2534 \begin_inset space ~
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_layout Standard
2592 manual lists all other things bound to the
2600 \begin_layout Standard
2601 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2602 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2603 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2604 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2605 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2606 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2607 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2609 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2625 followed by a capital
2632 \begin_layout Chapter
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2646 \begin_layout Section
2648 \begin_inset Index idx
2651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2660 \begin_layout Subsection
2664 \begin_layout Standard
2665 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2666 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2667 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2668 numbering schemes, and so on.
2669 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2670 and format the title of your document differently.
2673 \begin_layout Standard
2678 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2679 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2680 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2681 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2682 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2685 \begin_layout Subsection
2687 \begin_inset Index idx
2690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2699 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2706 \begin_layout Standard
2707 You can select a class using the
2709 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2710 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2714 \begin_inset Index idx
2717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2733 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2737 \begin_layout Description
2738 Article for basic articles
2741 \begin_layout Description
2742 Report for basic reports
2745 \begin_layout Description
2746 Book for writing a book
2749 \begin_layout Description
2750 Letter for US-style letters
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2755 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2756 will include many of these.
2757 Here are some of the classes.
2758 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2760 Special Document Classes
2769 \begin_layout Description
2770 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2773 \begin_layout Description
2774 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2783 \begin_layout Description
2784 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2785 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2786 There are three article layouts available.
2787 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2788 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2789 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2790 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2795 sequential numbering
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2799 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2800 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2801 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2802 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 Beamer Layout for presentations
2809 \begin_layout Description
2810 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2811 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2819 \begin_layout Description
2821 \begin_inset space ~
2824 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2827 \begin_layout Description
2828 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2831 \begin_layout Description
2832 Foils Used to make transparencies
2835 \begin_layout Description
2836 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2837 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2843 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2846 \begin_layout Description
2847 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2850 \begin_layout Description
2851 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2856 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2857 (Is used by this document.)
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2864 \begin_layout Description
2865 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2868 \begin_layout Description
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2881 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2883 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Slides Used to make transparencies
2890 \begin_layout Description
2892 \begin_inset space ~
2895 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2896 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2899 \begin_layout Description
2900 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2906 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2912 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2913 of the document classes.
2916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2920 \begin_layout Standard
2921 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2923 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2924 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2926 \begin_inset Index idx
2929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2946 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2947 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2949 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2954 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2955 and some of them, like
2959 , are highly specialized.
2960 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2961 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2963 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2964 by some document class.
2965 There are just too many of them.
2966 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2969 \begin_layout Standard
2970 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2978 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2979 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2980 document class for a new file.
2981 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2986 Installing new LaTeX files
2987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 manual for information on how to install them.
2995 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
3003 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3005 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3006 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3007 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3009 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3013 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3019 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3031 \begin_inset Index idx
3034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3043 \begin_layout Standard
3044 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3045 chosen document class.
3046 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3047 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3058 \begin_inset Index idx
3061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3068 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3074 always installed by default.
3075 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3076 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3077 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3078 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3079 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3080 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3081 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3084 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3088 \begin_inset Index idx
3091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3092 Reconfiguration of LyX
3098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3101 Installing new LaTeX files
3102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3109 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3112 \begin_layout Standard
3113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3121 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3122 LyX will advise you about these things.
3130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3134 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3139 \begin_inset Index idx
3142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3143 Document ! Local Layout
3151 \begin_layout Standard
3152 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3153 used in a variety of different documents.
3154 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3155 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3156 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3157 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3158 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3159 What you want is LyX's
3160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3176 manual for information on how to use it.
3179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3184 Each class has a default set of options.
3185 Here's a quick table describing them:
3188 \begin_layout Standard
3189 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3195 \begin_layout Standard
3197 \begin_inset Tabular
3198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3199 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 \begin_layout Standard
3659 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3665 \begin_layout Standard
3666 You're probably also wondering what
3667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3671 \begin_inset space ~
3675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3679 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3680 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3685 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3690 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3700 headings, there are also
3708 headings, and so on.
3709 We will describe these headings fully in section
3710 \begin_inset space ~
3714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3716 reference "sub:Headings"
3723 \begin_layout Subsection
3725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3727 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3732 \begin_inset Index idx
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3742 \begin_inset Index idx
3745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3754 \begin_layout Standard
3755 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3757 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3764 \begin_inset space ~
3772 \begin_inset space ~
3777 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3779 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3780 to use for your document.
3781 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3785 \begin_layout Standard
3789 \begin_inset space ~
3796 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3802 \begin_inset space ~
3807 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3808 You can choose between the following five options:
3811 \begin_layout Labeling
3812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3817 Use default page style of current class.
3820 \begin_layout Labeling
3821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3826 No page numbers or headings.
3829 \begin_layout Labeling
3830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3838 \begin_layout Labeling
3839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3844 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3845 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3846 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3849 \begin_layout Labeling
3850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3855 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3856 have the LaTeX-package
3861 \begin_inset Index idx
3864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3871 How they are defined is explained in section
3872 \begin_inset space ~
3876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3878 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3885 \begin_layout Standard
3886 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3887 \begin_inset space ~
3891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3893 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3900 \begin_layout Subsection
3901 Paper Size and Orientation
3902 \begin_inset Index idx
3905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3906 Document ! Paper size
3912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3914 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3921 \begin_layout Standard
3922 You can find the following options in the menu
3925 \begin_inset space ~
3932 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3936 \begin_inset Index idx
3939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 \begin_layout Labeling
3949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3953 \begin_inset space ~
3958 What size paper to print on.
3963 \begin_layout Itemize
3969 \begin_layout Itemize
3975 \begin_layout Itemize
3981 \begin_layout Itemize
3987 \begin_layout Itemize
3990 US letter, US legal, US executive
3993 \begin_layout Itemize
3999 \begin_layout Itemize
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 To choose whether to output as
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 \begin_inset space ~
4033 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4034 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4037 \begin_layout Subsection
4039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4046 \begin_inset Index idx
4049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4056 \begin_inset Index idx
4059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 \begin_layout Standard
4069 Paper margins are set in the menu
4071 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 \begin_layout Standard
4088 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4089 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4090 the paper format and the font size into account.
4093 \begin_layout Subsection
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4103 That includes the paragraph environments.
4104 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4105 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4106 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4107 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4116 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4118 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4119 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4120 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4123 \begin_layout Section
4124 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4125 \begin_inset Index idx
4128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4129 Paragraph ! Indentation
4137 \begin_layout Subsection
4139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4141 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4148 \begin_layout Standard
4149 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4150 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4153 \begin_layout Standard
4154 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4155 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4156 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4157 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4161 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4167 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4168 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4169 language than English.
4170 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4174 \begin_layout Standard
4175 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4176 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4178 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4179 LyX takes care of that.
4180 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4182 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4183 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4184 of a page, and so on.
4188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4189 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4194 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4195 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4199 these pre-coded spacings.
4200 We will explain more later.
4203 \begin_layout Subsection
4204 Paragraph Separation
4205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4207 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4212 \begin_inset Index idx
4215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4216 Paragraph ! Separation
4224 \begin_layout Standard
4232 \begin_inset space ~
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4247 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4251 \begin_inset Index idx
4254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4260 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4267 \begin_layout Standard
4268 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4271 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset space ~
4278 dialog and toggle the
4281 \begin_inset space ~
4286 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4289 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4293 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4294 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4298 \begin_layout Standard
4299 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4300 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4303 \begin_layout Subsection
4305 \begin_inset Index idx
4308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4309 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4317 \begin_layout Standard
4320 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4324 \begin_inset Index idx
4327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4336 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4340 \begin_inset space ~
4349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4355 \begin_inset Index idx
4358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4364 installed to use this feature.
4369 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4373 \begin_inset space ~
4378 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4379 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4382 \begin_layout Section
4383 Paragraph Environments
4384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4386 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4391 \begin_inset Index idx
4394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4395 Paragraph ! Environments
4401 \begin_inset Index idx
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4405 Paragraph environments|(
4413 \begin_layout Subsection
4417 \begin_layout Standard
4418 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4440 \begin_inset Newline newline
4443 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4444 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4445 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4454 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4457 \begin_layout Standard
4458 A paragraph environment is simply a
4459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4466 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4467 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4468 scheme, labels, and so on.
4469 Additionally, you can
4470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4477 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4478 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4479 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4480 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4482 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4484 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4489 \begin_inset Graphics
4490 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4496 at the left end of the toolbar.
4497 LyX will change the environment of the
4501 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4502 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4503 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4507 \begin_layout Standard
4516 create a new paragraph using the
4520 paragraph environment.
4522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4529 because if you are in one of these environments:
4532 \begin_layout Itemize
4538 \begin_layout Itemize
4544 \begin_layout Itemize
4550 \begin_layout Itemize
4556 \begin_layout Itemize
4562 \begin_layout Itemize
4568 \begin_layout Itemize
4574 \begin_layout Standard
4575 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4579 , rather than resetting it to
4584 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4585 \begin_inset space ~
4589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4591 reference "sec:Nesting"
4598 \begin_layout Subsection
4602 \begin_layout Standard
4603 The default paragraph environment is
4608 It creates a plain paragraph.
4609 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4610 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4611 this manual) are in the
4618 \begin_layout Standard
4619 You can nest a paragraph using the
4623 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4631 \begin_layout Subsection
4633 \begin_inset Index idx
4636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4646 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4655 for thanks or contact information.
4656 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4657 page along with today's date.
4658 For other types of documents, the title
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4670 \begin_layout Standard
4671 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4685 Here's how you use them:
4688 \begin_layout Itemize
4689 Put the title of your document in the
4696 \begin_layout Itemize
4697 Put the author name in the
4704 \begin_layout Itemize
4705 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4706 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4712 Note that using this environment is optional.
4713 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4714 If you don't want a date, use the option
4716 Suppress default date on front page
4720 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4721 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4723 \begin_inset space ~
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4732 You can use footnotes to insert
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 or contact information.
4743 \begin_layout Subsection
4745 \begin_inset Index idx
4748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4764 \begin_layout Standard
4765 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4766 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4771 \begin_inset Index idx
4774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4775 Section headings ! Numbered
4783 \begin_layout Standard
4784 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4788 \begin_layout Enumerate
4794 \begin_layout Enumerate
4800 \begin_layout Enumerate
4806 \begin_layout Enumerate
4812 \begin_layout Enumerate
4818 \begin_layout Enumerate
4824 \begin_layout Enumerate
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4832 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4833 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4836 \begin_layout Standard
4837 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4838 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4839 You group the book into chapters.
4840 LyX does a similar grouping:
4843 \begin_layout Itemize
4848 is divided into either
4859 \begin_layout Itemize
4871 \begin_layout Itemize
4883 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 \begin_layout Itemize
4907 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 \begin_layout Standard
4920 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4928 Not all document types use the
4932 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4937 is the top-level heading.
4945 \begin_layout Standard
4950 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4951 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4953 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4967 \begin_inset Index idx
4970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4971 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4979 \begin_layout Standard
4980 The unnumbered section headings have a
4981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4988 at the end of their name.
4989 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4990 the table of contents, see section
4991 \begin_inset space ~
4995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5005 Changing the Numbering
5006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5008 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5017 in the Table of Contents.
5018 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5020 Just as certain classes start with
5034 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5044 This is something you can change.
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5050 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5054 \begin_inset Index idx
5057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5066 \begin_inset space ~
5070 \begin_inset space ~
5075 you will see two counters.
5080 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5082 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5086 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5087 Short Titles of Headings
5088 \begin_inset Index idx
5091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5092 Section headings ! Short titles
5098 \begin_inset Argument 1
5101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5110 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5117 \begin_layout Standard
5118 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5119 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5120 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5121 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5126 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5127 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5128 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5131 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5133 \begin_inset space ~
5139 This will insert a box labeled
5140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5144 \begin_inset space ~
5148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5151 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5152 This also works for captions inside floats.
5153 There can only be one short title per title.
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5164 \begin_layout Standard
5165 The following information applies to all section headings:
5168 \begin_layout Itemize
5169 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5172 \begin_layout Itemize
5173 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5176 \begin_layout Itemize
5177 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5180 \begin_layout Itemize
5181 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5184 \begin_layout Subsection
5188 \begin_layout Standard
5189 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5203 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5204 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5205 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5206 the text they contain.
5207 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5215 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5218 \begin_layout Standard
5219 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5228 when you start a new paragraph.
5229 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5233 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5234 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5235 have to change back to the
5239 environment yourself.
5242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5251 \begin_inset Index idx
5254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5263 \begin_layout Standard
5264 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5265 time for the differences.
5274 are identical except for one difference:
5278 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5287 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5290 \begin_layout Standard
5291 Here's an example of the
5304 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5306 See – no indentation!
5310 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5311 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5312 the other paragraph.
5315 \begin_layout Standard
5316 Here's another example, this time in the
5323 \begin_layout Quotation
5329 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5330 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5331 the first line, then
5335 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5339 you were quoting other text.
5342 \begin_layout Quotation
5343 Here's a new paragraph.
5344 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5345 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5348 \begin_layout Standard
5349 As the examples show,
5353 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5354 They should put quotes in the
5359 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5363 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5368 \begin_inset Index idx
5371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5378 \begin_inset Index idx
5381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5402 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5408 \begin_inset Newline newline
5411 Which I did not rehearse!
5415 It could be much worse.
5416 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5418 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5419 indented a bit more than the first.
5420 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5426 \begin_inset Newline newline
5429 And make things look fine
5430 \begin_inset Newline newline
5436 arg "newline-insert newline"
5442 \begin_layout Standard
5447 does not indent both margins.
5448 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5449 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5452 arg "newline-insert newline"
5458 \begin_layout Subsection
5460 \begin_inset Index idx
5463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5479 \begin_layout Standard
5480 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5490 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5499 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5500 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5501 describing some general features of all four of them.
5504 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5508 \begin_layout Standard
5509 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5511 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5520 reset the environment to
5524 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5525 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5526 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5530 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5534 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5541 \begin_layout Standard
5542 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5543 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5545 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5546 you read all of section
5547 \begin_inset space ~
5551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5553 reference "sec:Nesting"
5560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5562 \begin_inset Index idx
5565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5581 \begin_layout Standard
5582 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5586 paragraph environment.
5587 It has the following properties:
5590 \begin_layout Itemize
5591 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5595 \begin_layout Itemize
5596 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5599 \begin_layout Itemize
5600 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5604 \begin_layout Itemize
5605 The items can have any length.
5606 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5607 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5614 \begin_layout Itemize
5619 environment inside another
5623 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5627 \begin_layout Itemize
5628 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5631 \begin_layout Itemize
5632 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5635 \begin_layout Itemize
5637 \begin_inset space ~
5641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5643 reference "sec:Nesting"
5647 for a full explanation of nesting.
5651 \begin_layout Standard
5652 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5661 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5664 \begin_layout Standard
5665 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5666 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5669 \begin_layout Itemize
5670 The label for the first level
5674 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5678 \begin_layout Itemize
5679 The label for the second level is a dash.
5683 \begin_layout Itemize
5684 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5688 \begin_layout Itemize
5689 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5693 \begin_layout Itemize
5694 Back out to the third level.
5698 \begin_layout Itemize
5699 Back to the second level.
5703 \begin_layout Itemize
5704 Back to the outermost level.
5707 \begin_layout Standard
5708 These are the default labels for an
5713 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5715 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5718 dialog in the submenu
5723 \begin_inset Index idx
5726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5732 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5735 \begin_layout Standard
5736 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5737 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5739 \begin_inset space ~
5743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5745 reference "sec:Nesting"
5752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5754 \begin_inset Index idx
5757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5766 name "sec:Enumerate"
5773 \begin_layout Standard
5778 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5779 It has these properties:
5782 \begin_layout Enumerate
5783 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5787 \begin_layout Enumerate
5788 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5792 \begin_layout Enumerate
5793 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5796 \begin_layout Enumerate
5801 environment resets the counter to one.
5804 \begin_layout Enumerate
5817 \begin_layout Enumerate
5818 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5819 Items can have any length.
5822 \begin_layout Enumerate
5823 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5826 \begin_layout Enumerate
5827 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5830 \begin_layout Enumerate
5831 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5835 \begin_layout Standard
5844 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5845 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5852 \begin_layout Enumerate
5853 The first level of an
5857 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5861 \begin_layout Enumerate
5862 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5866 \begin_layout Enumerate
5867 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5871 \begin_layout Enumerate
5872 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5875 \begin_layout Enumerate
5876 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5881 \begin_layout Enumerate
5882 Back to the third level
5886 \begin_layout Enumerate
5887 Back to the second level.
5891 \begin_layout Enumerate
5892 Back to the outermost level.
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5900 environment, see section
5901 \begin_inset space ~
5905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5907 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5912 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5915 \begin_layout Standard
5916 There is more to nesting
5920 environments than we've stated here.
5921 You should read section
5922 \begin_inset space ~
5926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5928 reference "sec:Nesting"
5932 to learn more about nesting.
5935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5937 \begin_inset Index idx
5940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5949 \begin_layout Standard
5950 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5954 list has no fixed label.
5955 Instead, LyX uses the first
5956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5963 of the first line as the label.
5967 \begin_layout Description
5968 Example: This is an example of the
5975 \begin_layout Standard
5976 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5980 \begin_layout Standard
5982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5989 it is meant that the first usage of the
5993 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5995 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6003 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6008 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6009 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6011 \begin_inset space ~
6017 \begin_inset space ~
6021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6023 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6027 for more information.) Here is an example:
6030 \begin_layout Description
6032 \begin_inset space ~
6035 Example: This one shows how to use a
6038 \begin_inset space ~
6050 \begin_layout Description
6051 Usage: You should use the
6055 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6056 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6058 It's not a good idea to use a
6062 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6063 You're better off using
6075 paragraphs into them.
6078 \begin_layout Description
6079 Nesting: You can nest
6083 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6087 \begin_layout Standard
6088 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6089 them from the first line.
6092 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6094 \begin_inset Index idx
6097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6106 \begin_layout Standard
6111 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6114 \begin_layout Standard
6123 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6125 Here are its properties:
6128 \begin_layout Labeling
6129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6131 \begin_inset space ~
6134 labels LyX uses the first
6135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6142 of each line as the item label.
6147 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6148 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6149 space as described above.
6152 \begin_layout Labeling
6153 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6154 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6155 the body of the item text.
6156 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6157 label width plus a little extra space.
6161 \begin_layout Labeling
6162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6164 \begin_inset space ~
6167 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6169 If the label width is larger, the label
6170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6177 into the first line.
6178 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6179 margin of the rest of the item text.
6182 \begin_layout Labeling
6183 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6185 \begin_inset space ~
6188 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6193 environment has the same left margin.
6194 \begin_inset Newline newline
6197 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6200 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6202 \begin_inset space ~
6207 dialog (toolbar button
6210 arg "layout-paragraph"
6217 \begin_inset space ~
6222 determines the default label width.
6223 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6232 multiple times instead.
6233 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6242 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6245 \begin_inset space ~
6250 every time you alter a label in a
6255 \begin_inset Newline newline
6258 The predefined default width is the length of
6259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6267 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_layout Standard
6278 list the same way as the
6282 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6288 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6292 \begin_layout Standard
6297 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6298 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6300 \begin_inset space ~
6304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6306 reference "sec:Nesting"
6310 to learn about nesting.
6313 \begin_layout Standard
6314 There is yet another feature of the
6318 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6320 You can use additional
6324 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6329 are documented in section
6330 \begin_inset space ~
6334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6336 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6341 Here are some examples:
6344 \begin_layout Labeling
6345 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6346 Left The default for
6353 \begin_layout Labeling
6354 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6355 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6362 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6365 \begin_layout Labeling
6366 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6367 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6371 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6378 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6381 \begin_layout Subsection
6383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6385 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6390 \begin_inset Index idx
6393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6402 \begin_layout Standard
6403 The features described in this section require that the module
6405 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6407 is loaded in the document settings.
6408 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6413 \begin_inset Index idx
6416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6417 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6426 Custom Enumerate Lists
6427 \begin_inset Index idx
6430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6431 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6439 \begin_layout Standard
6441 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6444 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6447 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6448 There you add the command
6451 \begin_layout Standard
6459 \begin_layout Standard
6460 in TeX Code (shortcut
6470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6471 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6472 \begin_inset space ~
6476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6478 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6491 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6498 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6499 For capital Roman numerals replace
6511 in the command above.
6512 For Arabic numerals use
6520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6527 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6542 \begin_layout Standard
6544 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6552 You can only number 26
6553 \begin_inset space ~
6556 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6564 \begin_layout Standard
6565 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6566 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6569 \begin_layout Standard
6570 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6573 \begin_layout Enumerate
6574 \begin_inset Argument 1
6577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6603 \begin_layout Enumerate
6604 \begin_inset Argument 1
6607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6630 \begin_layout Enumerate
6635 \begin_layout Enumerate
6636 \begin_inset Argument 1
6639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 \begin_layout Enumerate
6664 \begin_inset Argument 1
6667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 \begin_layout Standard
6694 For this list these commands were used:
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6708 \begin_inset Newline newline
6716 \begin_inset Newline newline
6724 \begin_inset Newline newline
6734 \begin_layout Standard
6741 makes the label emphasized and
6750 \begin_layout Standard
6751 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6759 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6760 lists until you change the definition.
6768 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6770 \begin_inset Index idx
6773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6774 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6782 \begin_layout Standard
6783 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6786 \begin_layout Enumerate
6787 \begin_inset Argument 1
6790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6809 \begin_inset Note Note
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6813 goes back to default numbering
6821 \begin_layout Enumerate
6825 \begin_layout Standard
6829 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6839 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6840 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6843 \begin_layout Standard
6844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6852 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6860 \begin_layout Standard
6861 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6863 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6864 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6865 of a normal enumeration.
6866 There, insert the command
6869 \begin_layout Standard
6875 \begin_layout Standard
6880 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6884 \begin_layout Enumerate
6888 \begin_layout Enumerate
6892 \begin_layout Standard
6893 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6896 \begin_layout Enumerate
6897 \begin_inset Argument 1
6900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6916 This enumeration starts at 4
6919 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6921 \begin_inset Index idx
6924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6933 \begin_layout Standard
6934 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6936 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6939 \begin_layout Itemize
6943 \begin_layout Itemize
6944 with standard spacing
6947 \begin_layout Standard
6948 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6950 Add there the command
6954 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6957 \begin_layout Itemize
6958 \begin_inset Argument 1
6961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6980 \begin_layout Itemize
6984 \begin_layout Itemize
6988 \begin_layout Standard
6989 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6995 \begin_inset Index idx
6998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7005 For more information see its documentation,
7006 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7018 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7019 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7023 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7026 \begin_layout Enumerate
7027 \begin_inset Argument 1
7030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate
7052 with negative indentation
7055 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7056 Further Customization
7057 \begin_inset Index idx
7060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7061 Lists ! Customization
7069 \begin_layout Standard
7070 You can also change the style of description lists.
7074 \begin_layout Standard
7080 \begin_layout Standard
7081 changes the description label font, the command
7084 \begin_layout Standard
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7091 sets the list style.
7094 \begin_layout Standard
7095 An example where the command
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7103 itshape, style=nextline
7106 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_layout Description
7112 \begin_inset space ~
7116 \begin_inset Argument 1
7119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7125 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7127 itshape, style=nextline
7137 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7138 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7142 \begin_layout Description
7144 \begin_inset space ~
7147 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7148 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7149 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7152 \begin_layout Standard
7153 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7159 \begin_inset Index idx
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7163 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7169 For more information see its documentation
7170 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7179 \begin_layout Subsection
7181 \begin_inset Index idx
7184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7195 \begin_inset space ~
7198 Address: An Overview
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7210 \begin_inset space ~
7216 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7217 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7218 In contrast, you can use the
7225 \begin_inset space ~
7230 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7231 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7235 \begin_layout Standard
7236 Of course, you're not limited to using
7243 \begin_inset space ~
7252 \begin_inset space ~
7257 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7258 some European academic papers.
7261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7265 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7272 \begin_layout Standard
7277 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7278 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7282 \begin_inset space ~
7287 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7288 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7289 Here's an example of each:
7292 \begin_layout Right Address
7294 \begin_inset Newline newline
7298 \begin_inset Newline newline
7302 \begin_inset Newline newline
7305 When is it? What is today?
7308 \begin_layout Standard
7312 \begin_inset space ~
7318 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7319 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7320 Here's an example of the
7327 \begin_layout Address
7329 \begin_inset Newline newline
7332 Where do I send this
7333 \begin_inset Newline newline
7336 Your post office and country
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 As you can see, both
7347 \begin_inset space ~
7352 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7357 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7363 This makes sense, since
7371 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7372 Thus, you have to use
7379 arg "newline-insert newline"
7384 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7385 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7387 \begin_inset space ~
7391 \begin_inset space ~
7396 ) to start a new line in an
7403 \begin_inset space ~
7411 \begin_layout Subsection
7415 \begin_layout Standard
7416 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7417 or list of references.
7418 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7423 \begin_inset Index idx
7426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7435 \begin_layout Standard
7440 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7441 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7442 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7443 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7457 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7458 The book document classes ignores the
7462 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7466 in a letter document class.
7469 \begin_layout Standard
7474 environment does several things for you.
7475 First, it puts the centered label
7476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7484 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7486 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7487 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7488 the subsequent text.
7489 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7490 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7494 \begin_layout Standard
7495 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7499 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7500 The new paragraph will still be in the
7505 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7506 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 \begin_inset Float figure
7515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7517 \begin_inset Graphics
7518 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7526 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7531 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7552 \begin_layout Standard
7553 We would love to demonstrate the
7557 environment, but since this document is in the
7558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7565 class, we can't do this.
7566 We inserted it therefore as figure
7567 \begin_inset space ~
7571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7573 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7578 If you have never heard of an
7579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7586 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7591 \begin_inset Index idx
7594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7603 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7610 \begin_layout Standard
7615 environment is used to list references.
7616 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7617 only use it at the end of the document.
7629 \begin_layout Standard
7630 When you first open a
7634 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7650 depending on the document class.
7651 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7652 Each paragraph of the
7656 environment is a bibliography entry.
7661 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7662 Each new paragraph is still in the
7669 \begin_layout Standard
7670 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7671 by using a BibTeX database.
7672 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7673 phy handling, have a look at section
7674 \begin_inset space ~
7678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7680 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7688 Special Environments
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 LyX provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of
7693 a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7719 \begin_layout Standard
7724 environment is a LyX extension.
7725 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7730 key as a fixed whitespace.
7734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7746 \begin_inset space ~
7751 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7764 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7766 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7769 arg "newline-insert newline"
7786 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7787 So, when you finish using the
7791 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7792 Also, you can nest the
7796 environment inside of others.
7799 \begin_layout Standard
7800 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7803 \begin_layout Itemize
7807 arg "newline-insert newline"
7810 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7815 \begin_inset space \space{}
7825 arg "newline-insert newline"
7831 \begin_layout Itemize
7835 arg "newline-insert newline"
7845 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7851 \begin_layout Itemize
7852 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7853 You must put at least one
7857 in any line you want blank.
7858 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7861 \begin_layout Itemize
7862 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7866 since that will insert
7871 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7874 arg "self-insert \""
7880 \begin_layout Standard
7884 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7888 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7892 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7896 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7900 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7901 printf("Hello World!
7906 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7910 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7914 \begin_layout Standard
7915 This is just the standard
7916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7927 \begin_layout Standard
7932 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
7934 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7935 as if you used a typewriter.
7936 \begin_inset Index idx
7939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7940 Paragraph environments|)
7945 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7948 Program Code Listings
7953 \begin_inset space ~
7961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7965 \begin_inset Index idx
7968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7977 \begin_layout Standard
7982 environment is similar to the
7986 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
7987 computer console text.
7992 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8005 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8006 you can have empty lines.
8018 \begin_layout Itemize
8019 have a certain language and a text style
8022 \begin_layout Itemize
8023 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8024 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8028 \begin_layout Itemize
8029 contain the following characters (you will get LaTeX errors): µ ; ´ ; ³
8033 \begin_layout Standard
8034 Because of these properties
8038 works like a typewriter.
8042 \begin_layout Verbatim
8047 \begin_layout Verbatim
8051 The following 2 lines are empty:
8054 \begin_layout Verbatim
8058 \begin_layout Verbatim
8062 \begin_layout Verbatim
8064 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8069 \begin_layout Section
8070 Nesting Environments
8071 \begin_inset Index idx
8074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8075 Nesting ! Environments
8081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8090 \begin_layout Subsection
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8097 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8099 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8101 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8113 \begin_layout Enumerate
8117 \begin_layout Enumerate
8122 \begin_layout Enumerate
8126 \begin_layout Enumerate
8131 \begin_layout Enumerate
8135 \begin_layout Standard
8136 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8137 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8139 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8141 \begin_inset space ~
8145 \begin_inset space ~
8153 \begin_inset space ~
8157 \begin_inset space ~
8162 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8164 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8167 arg "depth-increment"
8173 arg "depth-decrement"
8187 arg "depth-increment"
8193 arg "depth-decrement"
8197 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8198 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8202 \begin_layout Standard
8203 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8204 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8205 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8206 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8209 \begin_layout Standard
8210 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8211 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8213 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8216 \begin_layout Subsection
8217 What You Can and Can't Nest
8220 \begin_layout Standard
8221 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8222 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8225 \begin_layout Standard
8226 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8227 than a simple yes or no.
8228 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8231 \begin_layout Itemize
8232 Completely unnestable
8235 \begin_layout Itemize
8236 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8240 \begin_layout Itemize
8241 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8245 \begin_layout Standard
8246 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8247 environments have them:
8250 \begin_layout Description
8251 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8252 Can't nest into them.
8256 \begin_layout Itemize
8262 \begin_layout Itemize
8268 \begin_layout Itemize
8274 \begin_layout Itemize
8280 \begin_layout Itemize
8287 \begin_layout Description
8289 \begin_inset space ~
8292 Nestable You can nest them.
8293 You can nest other things into them.
8297 \begin_layout Itemize
8303 \begin_layout Itemize
8309 \begin_layout Itemize
8315 \begin_layout Itemize
8321 \begin_layout Itemize
8327 \begin_layout Itemize
8333 \begin_layout Itemize
8339 \begin_layout Itemize
8345 \begin_layout Itemize
8352 \begin_layout Description
8353 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8354 You can't nest anything into them.
8358 \begin_layout Itemize
8364 \begin_layout Itemize
8370 \begin_layout Itemize
8376 \begin_layout Itemize
8382 \begin_layout Itemize
8388 \begin_layout Itemize
8394 \begin_layout Itemize
8400 \begin_layout Itemize
8406 \begin_layout Itemize
8412 \begin_layout Itemize
8418 \begin_layout Itemize
8424 \begin_layout Itemize
8430 \begin_layout Itemize
8436 \begin_layout Itemize
8440 \begin_inset space ~
8446 \begin_layout Itemize
8453 \begin_layout Standard
8454 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8462 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8475 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8476 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8477 nested section headings violate this.
8485 \begin_layout Subsection
8486 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8487 \begin_inset Index idx
8490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8491 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8499 \begin_layout Standard
8500 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8501 affected by nesting anyhow.
8505 \begin_layout Itemize
8509 \begin_layout Itemize
8513 \begin_layout Itemize
8517 \begin_layout Standard
8519 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8527 Figures and tables in
8531 are not affected by this.
8536 Have a look at section
8537 \begin_inset space ~
8541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8543 reference "sec:Floats"
8547 for more information about
8554 \begin_layout Standard
8555 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8556 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8560 \begin_layout Standard
8561 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8569 of its own, it behaves just like a
8570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8577 paragraph environment.
8578 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8582 \begin_layout Standard
8583 Here's an example with a table:
8586 \begin_layout Enumerate
8591 \begin_layout Enumerate
8592 This is (a) and it's nested.
8596 \begin_layout Standard
8597 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8603 \begin_layout Standard
8605 \begin_inset Tabular
8606 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8607 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8608 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8609 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8693 \begin_layout Standard
8694 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8701 \begin_layout Enumerate
8703 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8707 \begin_layout Enumerate
8711 \begin_layout Standard
8712 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8715 \begin_layout Enumerate
8720 \begin_layout Enumerate
8721 This is (a) and it's nested.
8725 \begin_layout Standard
8726 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8732 \begin_layout Standard
8734 \begin_inset Tabular
8735 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8736 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8737 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8738 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8822 \begin_layout Standard
8823 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8829 \begin_layout Enumerate
8836 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8839 \begin_layout Enumerate
8843 \begin_layout Standard
8844 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8848 \begin_layout Standard
8849 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8851 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8854 \begin_layout Enumerate
8859 \begin_layout Enumerate
8860 This is (a) and it's nested.
8863 \begin_layout Standard
8864 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8870 \begin_layout Standard
8872 \begin_inset Tabular
8873 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8874 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8875 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8876 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8961 \begin_layout Standard
8962 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8968 \begin_layout Enumerate
8970 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8977 \begin_layout Enumerate
8981 \begin_layout Standard
8982 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8988 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8989 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8993 \begin_layout Subsection
8994 Usage and General Features
8997 \begin_layout Standard
8998 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9007 is the innermost possible depth.
9008 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9011 \begin_layout Enumerate
9012 level #1 – outermost
9016 \begin_layout Enumerate
9021 \begin_layout Enumerate
9026 \begin_layout Enumerate
9031 \begin_layout Itemize
9036 \begin_layout Itemize
9045 \begin_layout Standard
9046 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9047 both of them in the example.
9048 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9058 For example, if we tried to nest another
9063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9070 , we would get errors.
9073 \begin_layout Subsection
9075 \begin_inset Index idx
9078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9087 \begin_layout Standard
9088 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9089 We have several examples of nested environments.
9090 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9095 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9098 \begin_layout Labeling
9099 \labelwidthstring MMM
9100 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9109 \begin_layout Labeling
9110 \labelwidthstring MMM
9111 #2-a This is level #2.
9112 We created it by using
9115 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9121 arg "depth-increment"
9128 \begin_layout Labeling
9129 \labelwidthstring MMM
9130 #3-a This is level #3.
9131 This time, we just enter
9138 arg "depth-increment"
9142 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9146 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9152 arg "depth-increment"
9159 \begin_layout Standard
9164 environment, nested inside of
9165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9173 So, it's at level #4.
9174 We did this by entering
9177 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9183 arg "depth-increment"
9186 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9191 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9207 \begin_layout Standard
9212 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9215 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9221 \begin_layout Labeling
9222 \labelwidthstring MMM
9223 #4-a This is level #4.
9227 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9230 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9235 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9239 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9244 keep nesting things inside
9245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9256 \begin_layout Labeling
9257 \labelwidthstring MMM
9258 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9263 \begin_layout Labeling
9264 \labelwidthstring MMM
9265 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9266 and this is level #6.
9267 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9271 \begin_layout Labeling
9272 \labelwidthstring MMM
9273 #5-b Back to level #5.
9277 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9283 arg "depth-decrement"
9290 \begin_layout Labeling
9291 \labelwidthstring MMM
9295 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9301 arg "depth-decrement"
9304 , we're back at level #4.
9308 \begin_layout Labeling
9309 \labelwidthstring MMM
9310 #3-b Back to level #3.
9311 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9315 \begin_layout Labeling
9316 \labelwidthstring MMM
9317 #2-b Back to level #2.
9322 \begin_layout Labeling
9323 \labelwidthstring MMM
9324 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9325 After this sentence, we will enter
9329 and change the paragraph environment back to
9336 \begin_layout Standard
9337 We could have also used the
9353 environment in place of the
9358 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9361 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9362 Example 2: Inheritance
9365 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9366 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9369 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9378 arg "depth-increment"
9382 \begin_inset Newline newline
9385 which, we will change to the
9393 \begin_layout Enumerate
9398 environment, at level #2.
9401 \begin_layout Enumerate
9402 Notice how the nested
9406 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9410 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9414 \begin_layout Standard
9415 We ended this example by entering
9420 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9424 and reset the nesting depth by using
9427 arg "depth-decrement"
9433 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9434 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9443 \begin_inset Argument 1
9446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9447 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9455 \begin_layout Enumerate
9456 This is level #1, in an
9460 paragraph environment.
9461 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9465 \begin_layout Enumerate
9470 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9476 arg "depth-increment"
9480 Now, what happens if we nest an
9484 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9485 label be? An asterisk?
9489 \begin_layout Itemize
9499 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9500 So, its label is a bullet.
9501 (We got here by using
9504 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9510 arg "depth-increment"
9513 , then changing the environment to
9521 \begin_layout Itemize
9522 Here's level #4, produced using
9525 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9531 arg "depth-increment"
9535 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9540 \begin_layout Enumerate
9541 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9543 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9548 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9552 , because we are in the
9560 environment (that is, it is an
9575 \begin_layout Enumerate
9580 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9581 type of numbering does LyX use?
9584 \begin_layout Enumerate
9585 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9588 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9591 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9594 \begin_layout Enumerate
9598 arg "depth-decrement"
9601 to decrease the depth after the next
9604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9611 \begin_layout Enumerate
9613 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9617 \begin_layout Enumerate
9619 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9620 numeral as the label.Why?
9623 \begin_layout Enumerate
9624 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9633 Notice, however, that LyX
9637 reset the counter for the label.
9641 \begin_layout Enumerate
9645 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9651 arg "depth-decrement"
9654 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9655 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9656 into the twofold-nested
9664 \begin_layout Enumerate
9665 The same thing happens if we do another
9668 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9674 arg "depth-decrement"
9677 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9680 \begin_layout Standard
9681 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9686 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9700 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9706 The same rule applies for the
9710 environment, as well.
9713 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9714 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9717 \begin_layout Enumerate
9718 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9719 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9720 the same detail with how we did it.
9729 \begin_layout Standard
9737 arg "depth-increment"
9744 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9745 the example in parentheses someplace.
9746 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9747 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9748 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9752 \begin_layout Enumerate
9757 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9762 Now we will add verse.
9763 \begin_inset Newline newline
9766 It will get much worse.
9767 \begin_inset Newline newline
9777 arg "depth-increment"
9788 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9789 \begin_inset Newline newline
9792 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9793 \begin_inset Newline newline
9799 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9812 \begin_layout Standard
9813 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9819 \begin_layout Standard
9821 \begin_inset Tabular
9822 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9823 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9824 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9825 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9914 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9924 arg "depth-increment"
9930 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9936 \begin_inset Newline newline
9944 arg "depth-decrement"
9951 \begin_layout Enumerate
9956 : level #1) This is another item.
9957 Note that selecting a
9961 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9962 3 times to put the table inside the
9970 \begin_layout Quotation
9971 We're now ending the
9975 list and changing to
9980 We're still at level #1.
9981 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9982 The next set of paragraphs is a
9983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9990 We will nest both the
9997 \begin_inset space ~
10002 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10006 for the letter body.
10010 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10013 to preserve the depth.
10014 Remember that you need to use
10017 arg "newline-insert newline"
10020 to create multiple lines inside the
10027 \begin_inset space ~
10037 \begin_layout Right Address
10039 \begin_inset Newline newline
10042 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10043 \begin_inset Newline newline
10049 \begin_layout Address
10051 \begin_inset space ~
10057 \begin_layout Quotation
10058 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10062 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10063 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10064 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10065 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10066 as soon as possible.
10067 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10070 \begin_layout Quotation
10071 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10072 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10073 with your order, along with payment.
10076 \begin_layout Quotation
10077 We thank you again for your patience.
10080 \begin_layout Address
10082 \begin_inset Newline newline
10089 \begin_layout Quotation
10090 That ends that example!
10093 \begin_layout Standard
10094 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10095 just a few keystrokes.
10096 We could have easily nested an
10117 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10120 \begin_layout Subsection
10122 \begin_inset Index idx
10125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10126 Nesting ! Separation
10134 \begin_layout Standard
10135 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10137 For example you need two different enumerations:
10140 \begin_layout Enumerate
10145 \begin_layout Enumerate
10150 \begin_layout Enumerate
10154 \begin_layout --Separator--
10158 \begin_layout Itemize
10164 \begin_layout --Separator--
10168 \begin_layout Enumerate
10172 \begin_layout Enumerate
10176 \begin_layout Enumerate
10180 \begin_layout Standard
10181 To tell LyX that there are two lists an not one, set the cursor at the end
10182 of the last item and use the menu
10184 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10185 Start New Parent Environment
10188 This adds an environment separator and a new list behind it.
10189 If you use instead the menu
10191 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10192 Start New Environment
10194 a new list will also be created, but in the same besting level.
10197 \begin_layout Section
10198 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10199 \begin_inset Index idx
10202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10211 \begin_layout Standard
10212 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10213 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10214 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10215 be broken at the end of a line.
10216 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10220 \begin_layout Subsection
10222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10224 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10229 \begin_inset Index idx
10232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10241 \begin_layout Standard
10242 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10243 line at that point.
10244 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10247 \begin_layout Quote
10248 Further documentation is given in section
10249 \begin_inset Newline newline
10253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10255 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10263 \begin_layout Standard
10264 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10279 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10288 A protected space is set with
10290 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10291 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10293 \begin_inset space ~
10301 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10307 \begin_layout Subsection
10309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10311 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10316 \begin_inset Index idx
10319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10320 Spacing ! Horizontal
10328 \begin_layout Standard
10329 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10331 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10332 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10336 The length units are listed in Appendix
10337 \begin_inset space ~
10341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10343 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10350 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10354 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10359 \begin_inset Index idx
10362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10363 Spaces ! Inter-word
10371 \begin_layout Standard
10372 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10373 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10374 at the ends of sentences.
10375 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10376 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10377 followed by a period; see section
10378 \begin_inset space ~
10382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10384 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10389 To insert a normal space, select
10391 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10392 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10394 \begin_inset space ~
10402 arg "space-insert normal"
10408 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10412 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10417 \begin_inset Index idx
10420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10429 \begin_layout Standard
10431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10438 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10447 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10448 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10449 inside abbreviations:
10452 \begin_layout Quote
10454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10458 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10461 \begin_layout Standard
10462 or between values and units.
10463 Compare for example this:
10464 \begin_inset Newline newline
10468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10472 \begin_inset Newline newline
10475 10 kg (normal space
10478 \begin_layout Standard
10479 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10481 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10482 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10484 \begin_inset space ~
10492 arg "space-insert thin"
10498 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10502 \begin_layout Standard
10503 You can also insert the following space types:
10506 \begin_layout Description
10508 \begin_inset space ~
10512 \begin_inset space ~
10515 space A line with a
10516 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10520 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10524 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10527 negative thin space between the arrows.
10530 \begin_layout Description
10532 \begin_inset space ~
10536 \begin_inset space ~
10539 space A line with a
10540 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10544 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10548 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10551 negative medium space between the arrows.
10554 \begin_layout Description
10556 \begin_inset space ~
10560 \begin_inset space ~
10563 space A line with a
10564 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10568 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10572 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10575 negative thick space between the arrows.
10578 \begin_layout Description
10580 \begin_inset space ~
10584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10588 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10592 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10596 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10600 \begin_inset space ~
10604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10607 em) space between the arrows.
10610 \begin_layout Description
10612 \begin_inset space ~
10616 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10620 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10624 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10628 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10632 \begin_inset space ~
10636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10639 em) space between the arrows.
10642 \begin_layout Description
10644 \begin_inset space ~
10648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10652 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10656 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10660 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10664 \begin_inset space ~
10668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10671 em) space between the arrows.
10674 \begin_layout Description
10676 \begin_inset space ~
10680 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10684 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10689 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10693 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10696 cm space between the arrows.
10699 \begin_layout Standard
10701 \begin_inset space ~
10705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10707 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10711 lists the different space sizes.
10714 \begin_layout Standard
10715 \begin_inset Float table
10720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10721 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10726 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10730 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10740 \begin_inset Tabular
10741 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10742 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10743 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10744 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10784 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10832 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10860 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10864 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10888 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10955 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11019 \begin_inset Index idx
11022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11031 \begin_layout Standard
11032 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
11033 in a uniform fashion.
11034 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11035 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11036 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11037 equally between themselves.
11040 \begin_layout Standard
11041 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11044 \begin_layout Quote
11046 This is on the left side
11047 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11050 This is on the right
11053 \begin_layout Quote
11056 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11060 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11066 \begin_layout Quote
11069 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11073 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11077 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11083 \begin_layout Standard
11084 That was an example in the
11090 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11094 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11098 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11101 is one in a standard paragraph.
11102 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11106 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11109 \begin_layout Standard
11110 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11113 \begin_inset space ~
11118 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11121 \begin_layout Standard
11123 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11127 \begin_inset space ~
11133 \begin_layout Standard
11135 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11139 \begin_inset space ~
11145 \begin_layout Standard
11147 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11151 \begin_inset space ~
11157 \begin_layout Standard
11159 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11163 \begin_inset space ~
11169 \begin_layout Standard
11171 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11175 \begin_inset space ~
11181 \begin_layout Standard
11183 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11187 \begin_inset space ~
11193 \begin_layout Standard
11194 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11202 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11206 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
11207 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11208 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11212 option in the space dialog.
11220 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11224 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11229 \begin_inset Index idx
11232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11241 \begin_layout Standard
11242 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11243 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11246 \begin_layout Standard
11247 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11250 What is correct English?:
11251 \begin_inset Newline newline
11255 \begin_inset Newline newline
11259 \begin_inset space ~
11262 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11263 \begin_inset Newline newline
11267 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11278 \begin_inset Newline newline
11282 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11293 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11299 \begin_layout Standard
11301 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11306 \begin_inset space ~
11310 \begin_inset space ~
11314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11318 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11320 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11321 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11325 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11331 \begin_inset space ~
11335 \begin_inset space ~
11339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11342 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11351 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11352 That is why it is named
11353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11361 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11362 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11366 \begin_layout Subsection
11368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11370 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11375 \begin_inset Index idx
11378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11387 \begin_layout Standard
11388 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11390 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11391 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11393 \begin_inset space ~
11399 There you find the following sizes:
11402 \begin_layout Standard
11415 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11420 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11422 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11423 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11425 \begin_inset space ~
11431 \begin_inset Index idx
11434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11435 Document ! Settings
11440 for the paragraph separation.
11441 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11452 \begin_layout Standard
11458 \begin_inset Index idx
11461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11467 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11468 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11473 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11474 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11483 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11492 s are described in section
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11499 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11508 If there are several
11512 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11513 You can therefore use
11517 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11520 \begin_layout Standard
11525 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11526 \begin_inset space ~
11530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11532 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11539 \begin_layout Standard
11540 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11550 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11551 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11563 \begin_layout Subsection
11564 Paragraph Alignment
11565 \begin_inset Index idx
11568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11569 Paragraph ! Alignment
11577 \begin_layout Standard
11578 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11580 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11583 dialog (toolbar button
11586 arg "layout-paragraph"
11590 There are five possibilities:
11593 \begin_layout Itemize
11601 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11607 \begin_layout Itemize
11615 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11621 \begin_layout Itemize
11629 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11635 \begin_layout Itemize
11643 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11649 \begin_layout Itemize
11657 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11663 \begin_layout Standard
11664 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11665 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11666 the left and right margins.
11667 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11670 \begin_layout Standard
11672 This paragraph is right aligned,
11675 \begin_layout Standard
11677 this one is centered,
11680 \begin_layout Standard
11682 this one is left aligned.
11685 \begin_layout Subsection
11687 \begin_inset Index idx
11690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11691 Page breaks ! Forced
11697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11699 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11706 \begin_layout Standard
11707 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11708 can force a page break where you want one.
11709 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11710 Only if you use a lot of
11714 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11717 \begin_layout Standard
11718 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11719 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11723 have to change the page breaking.
11726 \begin_layout Standard
11727 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11729 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11731 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11732 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11734 \begin_inset space ~
11740 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11742 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11743 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11745 \begin_inset space ~
11750 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11752 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11753 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11756 \begin_layout Standard
11757 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11758 at the top of a page.
11759 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11760 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11761 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11762 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11766 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11770 to learn more about
11777 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11781 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11786 \begin_inset Index idx
11789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11790 Page breaks ! Clear
11798 \begin_layout Standard
11799 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11800 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11801 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11802 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11803 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11806 \begin_layout Standard
11807 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11809 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11810 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11812 \begin_inset space ~
11818 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11820 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11821 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11823 \begin_inset space ~
11827 \begin_inset space ~
11832 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11833 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11836 \begin_layout Subsection
11838 \begin_inset Index idx
11841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11850 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11857 \begin_layout Standard
11858 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11860 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11862 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11863 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11865 \begin_inset space ~
11869 \begin_inset space ~
11877 arg "newline-insert newline"
11881 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11883 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11884 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11886 \begin_inset space ~
11890 \begin_inset space ~
11898 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11901 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11903 This is useful to avoid
11904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11911 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11914 \begin_layout Standard
11915 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11916 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11917 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11918 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11919 \begin_inset space ~
11923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11925 reference "sec:Quote"
11930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11932 reference "sec:Verse"
11937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11939 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11946 \begin_layout Subsection
11948 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11950 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11955 \begin_inset Index idx
11958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11967 \begin_layout Standard
11969 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11980 \begin_layout Standard
11984 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11985 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11987 \begin_inset space ~
11992 you can insert horizontal lines.
11993 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11994 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11995 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11998 \begin_layout Standard
12000 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12011 \begin_layout Section
12012 Characters and Symbols
12015 \begin_layout Standard
12016 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12017 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12018 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12026 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
12030 for information on how this is done.
12033 \begin_layout Standard
12034 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12039 dialog via the menu
12041 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12042 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12048 \begin_layout Standard
12049 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12057 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12058 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
12059 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12067 \begin_layout Section
12068 Fonts and Text Styles
12069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12071 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12078 \begin_layout Subsection
12080 \begin_inset Index idx
12083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12092 \begin_layout Standard
12093 There are two types of fonts:
12096 \begin_layout Description
12098 \begin_inset space ~
12102 \begin_inset Index idx
12105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12111 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12112 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12116 characters) in the font.
12117 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12118 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12119 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12120 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12121 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12122 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12123 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12124 \begin_inset Newline newline
12127 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12128 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12129 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12130 sizes than at small ones.
12131 \begin_inset Newline newline
12145 \begin_inset space ~
12153 \begin_layout Description
12155 \begin_inset space ~
12159 \begin_inset Index idx
12162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12168 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12169 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12170 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12171 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12172 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12173 image manipulation program.
12174 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12175 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12176 \begin_inset space ~
12179 pixels high up to 34
12180 \begin_inset space ~
12183 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12184 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12185 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12187 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12188 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12189 \begin_inset Newline newline
12192 Bitmap fonts are named
12195 \begin_inset space ~
12200 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12203 \begin_layout Standard
12204 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12205 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12206 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12207 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12208 use scalable fonts.
12211 \begin_layout Standard
12212 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12215 \begin_layout Standard
12216 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12217 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12218 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12219 font to emphasize text, you use an
12220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12228 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12229 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12233 \begin_layout Subsection
12235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12237 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12244 \begin_layout Standard
12245 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12246 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12247 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12249 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12250 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12251 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12252 to a word processor.
12253 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12254 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12255 across different machines.
12256 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12257 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12259 LyX supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12261 \begin_inset space ~
12265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12267 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12272 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code in the document
12273 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12276 \begin_layout Standard
12277 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12278 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12280 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12281 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12282 that is installed on your system.
12283 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12286 \begin_layout Standard
12287 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12295 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12296 es; so you might have to experiment.
12304 \begin_layout Standard
12305 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12313 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12314 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12322 \begin_layout Subsection
12323 Document Font and Font size
12324 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12326 name "sub:Document-Font"
12331 \begin_inset Index idx
12334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12341 \begin_inset Index idx
12344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12353 \begin_layout Standard
12354 You can set the document fonts in the
12356 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12360 \begin_inset Index idx
12363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12364 Document ! Settings
12374 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12375 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12378 \begin_inset space ~
12387 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12389 \begin_inset space ~
12392 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12395 \begin_layout Standard
12402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12411 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12412 This requires that you use
12418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12457 as the output format, i.
12458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12462 \begin_inset space \space{}
12465 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12466 \begin_inset space ~
12470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12472 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12477 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12478 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12480 \begin_inset space ~
12483 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12484 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12485 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12487 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12490 \begin_layout Standard
12491 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12496 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12501 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12502 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12509 \begin_inset space ~
12515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12528 European Computer Modern
12531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12538 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12541 \begin_layout Standard
12550 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12551 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12556 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12559 \begin_inset space ~
12564 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12570 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12571 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12574 \begin_layout Itemize
12578 \begin_inset space ~
12583 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12596 \begin_inset space ~
12601 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12605 as the default font.
12606 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12607 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12610 \begin_inset space ~
12623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12624 One difference is improved kerning.
12632 \begin_layout Itemize
12636 \begin_inset space ~
12640 \begin_inset space ~
12645 fonts in (the rare) case that
12648 \begin_inset space ~
12653 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12668 Virtual means that it
12669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12680 -glyphs from other fonts.
12681 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12703 Loading the LaTeX-package
12708 \begin_inset Index idx
12711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12712 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12717 with the document preamble line
12718 \begin_inset Newline newline
12725 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12726 \begin_inset Newline newline
12731 will fix the guillemet problem.
12736 and that accented characters are not
12740 glyph, but built of
12744 characters, the accent and the letter.
12745 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12751 If you search for example for the French word
12752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12759 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12768 and not for the glyph
12769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12773 \begin_inset space ~
12777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12783 \begin_layout Itemize
12784 If you do not like the look of
12792 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12797 \begin_inset space ~
12803 \begin_inset space ~
12813 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12814 \begin_inset space ~
12817 serif and typewriter fonts,
12821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12822 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12829 \begin_inset space ~
12838 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12843 \begin_inset space \space{}
12851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12855 \begin_inset space \space{}
12861 \begin_inset space ~
12869 \begin_inset space ~
12879 but you can also select your own.
12880 \begin_inset Newline newline
12883 The differences between roman,
12886 \begin_inset space ~
12895 fonts are explained in section
12896 \begin_inset space ~
12900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12902 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12907 \begin_inset Newline newline
12913 \begin_inset space ~
12918 was originally designed for newspapers.
12919 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12920 into the small newspaper columns.
12924 \begin_inset space ~
12929 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12932 \begin_layout Standard
12933 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12946 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12951 depends on the class you are using.
12952 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12955 \begin_layout Standard
12956 Note that the font size is the
12961 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12962 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12963 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12966 \begin_inset space ~
12972 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12973 \begin_inset space ~
12977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12979 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12986 \begin_layout Standard
12990 \begin_inset space ~
12995 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12997 \begin_inset space ~
13000 serif or typewriter.
13005 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13015 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13018 \begin_layout Standard
13027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13036 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13042 \begin_inset Index idx
13045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13046 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
13052 \begin_inset space ~
13056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13058 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
13063 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13064 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13071 \begin_layout Standard
13072 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13074 Use Old Style Figures
13078 Use True Small Caps
13081 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13084 Use Old Style Figures
13086 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13088 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13096 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13100 Use True Small Caps
13102 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13103 of scaled capitals.
13104 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13105 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13108 \begin_layout Standard
13113 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13114 a font to display the script characters.
13118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13119 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
13124 \begin_inset Index idx
13127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13128 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
13133 So this has no effect for the document language
13147 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13151 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13159 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
13163 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13164 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13165 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13167 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13170 dialog, see section
13171 \begin_inset space ~
13175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13177 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
13189 \begin_layout Subsection
13193 \begin_layout Standard
13194 In LaTeX the font used for characters in equations is different from the
13196 For the case that you use TeX fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13197 choose a math font in the dialog
13199 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13203 \begin_inset Index idx
13206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13207 Document ! Settings
13213 The default setting is that LyX automatically selects a math font.
13214 For most cases this will be LaTeX's default -- the math variant of LaTeX's
13215 default font family
13216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13222 \begin_inset space ~
13228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13232 LyX will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of
13233 the document font is available.
13236 \begin_layout Standard
13237 Note that the math font will not be used for
13241 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13247 or by the insertion of the command
13254 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13255 \begin_inset space ~
13259 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13260 while the math characters do not.
13262 \begin_inset space ~
13265 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13268 \begin_inset space ~
13276 \begin_inset space ~
13281 in the document font settings.
13284 \begin_layout Standard
13285 If you use non-TeX fonts for the document, you can only choose for math
13286 to use either the document's class default TeX font (in most cases
13287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13293 \begin_inset space ~
13299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13302 ) or to use the non-TeX variant of the document's class default font (in
13304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13310 \begin_inset space ~
13316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13322 \begin_layout Subsection
13323 Using Different Character Styles
13324 \begin_inset Index idx
13327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13334 \begin_inset Index idx
13337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13346 \begin_layout Standard
13347 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13348 certain paragraph environments.
13349 LyX supports two character styles,
13358 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13362 \begin_layout Standard
13367 style, do one of the following:
13370 \begin_layout Itemize
13371 click on the toolbar button
13380 \begin_layout Itemize
13381 use the key binding
13390 \begin_layout Standard
13391 These commands are all toggles.
13396 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13399 \begin_layout Standard
13400 One typically uses the
13404 style for proper names.
13406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13413 is the original author of LyX.
13414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13420 \begin_layout Standard
13421 A more widely used character style is the
13426 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13433 \begin_layout Itemize
13434 clicking on the toolbar button
13443 \begin_layout Itemize
13444 using the keybindings
13453 \begin_layout Standard
13458 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13459 es use a different font.
13462 \begin_layout Standard
13463 We've been using the
13467 style all over the place in this document.
13468 Here's one more example:
13471 \begin_layout Quotation
13474 Do not overuse character styles!
13477 \begin_layout Standard
13478 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13479 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13480 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13481 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13485 \begin_layout Standard
13486 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13494 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13496 \begin_inset space ~
13499 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13505 arg "dialog-show character"
13511 \begin_layout Subsection
13512 Fine-Tuning with the
13517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13519 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13524 \begin_inset Index idx
13527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13536 \begin_layout Standard
13537 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13538 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13539 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13540 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13541 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13542 from ordinary dialog.
13545 \begin_layout Standard
13546 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13547 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13548 \begin_inset Newline newline
13551 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13552 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13555 \begin_layout Standard
13556 To use custom character styles, open the
13558 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13560 \begin_inset space ~
13563 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13566 dialog or press the toolbar button
13569 arg "dialog-show character"
13573 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13574 font property that you can choose.
13575 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13578 \begin_inset space ~
13583 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13588 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13589 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13590 environments all at once.
13593 \begin_layout Standard
13594 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13597 \begin_inset space ~
13609 \begin_layout Labeling
13610 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13624 The possible options are:
13628 \begin_layout Labeling
13629 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13634 This is the Roman font family.
13635 Normally a serif font.
13636 It's also the default family.
13646 \begin_layout Labeling
13647 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13651 \begin_inset space ~
13658 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13670 \begin_layout Labeling
13671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13678 This is the Typewriter font family.
13684 arg "font-typewriter"
13693 \begin_layout Labeling
13694 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13699 This corresponds to the print weight.
13704 \begin_layout Labeling
13705 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13710 This is the Medium font series.
13711 It's also the default series.
13714 \begin_layout Labeling
13715 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13722 This is the Bold font series.
13735 \begin_layout Labeling
13736 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13741 As the name implies.
13746 \begin_layout Labeling
13747 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13752 This is the Upright font shape.
13753 It's also the default shape.
13756 \begin_layout Labeling
13757 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13771 s the Italic font shape
13777 \begin_layout Labeling
13778 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13785 This is the Slanted font shape
13787 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13790 \begin_layout Labeling
13791 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13795 \begin_inset space ~
13802 This is the Small caps font shape
13809 \begin_layout Labeling
13810 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13815 Alters the text color.
13816 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13820 \begin_inset space ~
13825 , which means that the document default color set in
13827 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13828 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13834 \begin_inset space ~
13839 is used, you can choose between
13872 \begin_inset Index idx
13875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13884 \begin_layout Labeling
13885 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13890 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13891 the language of the document.
13892 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13894 \begin_inset Newline newline
13897 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13898 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13899 When using the spell checking (see section
13900 \begin_inset space ~
13904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13906 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13910 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13913 \begin_layout Labeling
13914 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13919 Alters the size of the font.
13920 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13921 proportional to the document font size.
13922 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13923 what you want to do.
13928 \begin_layout Labeling
13929 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13950 arg "font-size tiny"
13956 \begin_layout Labeling
13957 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13978 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13984 \begin_layout Labeling
13985 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14006 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14012 \begin_layout Labeling
14013 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14034 arg "font-size small"
14040 \begin_layout Labeling
14041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14055 It's also the default size.
14059 arg "font-size normal"
14065 \begin_layout Labeling
14066 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14087 arg "font-size large"
14093 \begin_layout Labeling
14094 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14115 arg "font-size larger"
14121 \begin_layout Labeling
14122 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14143 arg "font-size largest"
14149 \begin_layout Labeling
14150 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14171 arg "font-size huge"
14177 \begin_layout Labeling
14178 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14199 arg "font-size giant"
14205 \begin_layout Labeling
14206 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14211 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14231 arg "font-size increase"
14237 \begin_layout Labeling
14238 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14243 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14263 arg "font-size decrease"
14270 \begin_layout Standard
14275 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14276 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14277 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14278 — use those instead.
14279 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14282 \begin_layout Labeling
14283 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14288 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14293 \begin_layout Labeling
14294 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14301 This is text with emphasize on
14304 This might seem like the same as
14308 , but it is actually a bit different.
14314 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14316 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14319 \begin_layout Labeling
14320 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14327 This is text with Underbar on.
14333 arg "font-underline"
14339 \begin_inset Newline newline
14344 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14345 when you could not change fonts.
14346 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14347 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14351 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14354 \begin_layout Labeling
14355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14359 \begin_inset space ~
14366 This is text with Double underbar on.
14372 arg "font-underunderline"
14376 \begin_inset Newline newline
14379 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14380 about double underbar.
14383 \begin_layout Labeling
14384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14388 \begin_inset space ~
14395 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14401 arg "font-underwave"
14405 \begin_inset Newline newline
14408 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14409 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14412 \begin_layout Labeling
14413 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14420 This is text with Strikeout on.
14426 arg "font-strikeout"
14430 \begin_inset Newline newline
14433 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14434 changed in the meantime.
14437 \begin_layout Labeling
14438 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14445 This is text with Noun on.
14452 , this is a logical attribute.
14453 Normally it's equivalent to
14456 \begin_inset space ~
14465 \begin_layout Standard
14466 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14467 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14469 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14471 \begin_inset space ~
14474 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14480 arg "dialog-show character"
14483 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14484 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14487 arg "textstyle-apply"
14491 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14495 \begin_layout Standard
14496 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14503 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14504 (suppose you just set the shape to
14505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14523 \begin_inset space ~
14535 \begin_layout Standard
14536 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14544 \begin_inset space ~
14556 \begin_layout Itemize
14562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14569 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14587 \begin_inset Newline newline
14591 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14605 \begin_inset Note Note
14608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14609 For more on phantoms see section
14610 \begin_inset space ~
14614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14616 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14626 \begin_inset Newline newline
14632 \begin_layout Itemize
14637 fonts use characters with serifs.
14638 These are the small
14639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14646 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14647 The following example shows the difference:
14648 \begin_inset Newline newline
14652 \begin_inset Newline newline
14657 text without serifs
14660 \begin_inset Newline newline
14663 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14664 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14671 \begin_layout Itemize
14676 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14677 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14678 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14681 \begin_layout Standard
14682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14689 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14690 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14693 \begin_inset space ~
14698 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14699 the property to be removed.
14700 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14701 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14702 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14720 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14721 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14729 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14733 \begin_inset space ~
14738 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14749 If you, for example, set
14750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14768 \begin_inset space ~
14773 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14782 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14785 \begin_layout Standard
14786 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14787 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14790 \begin_layout Section
14791 Printing and Previewing
14794 \begin_layout Subsection
14798 \begin_layout Standard
14799 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14800 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14801 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14802 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14803 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14805 Additional Features
14810 \begin_layout Standard
14811 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14812 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14813 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14814 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14815 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14816 This happens in two stages:
14819 \begin_layout Enumerate
14820 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14821 generating a file with the extension,
14822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14836 \begin_layout Enumerate
14837 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14841 file to produce printable output.
14844 \begin_layout Subsection
14845 Output file formats
14846 \begin_inset Index idx
14849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14858 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14865 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14866 Simple text (ASCII)
14867 \begin_inset Index idx
14870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14871 File formats ! ASCII
14879 \begin_layout Standard
14880 This file type has the extension
14881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14893 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14897 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14904 \begin_layout Standard
14905 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14907 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14908 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14910 \begin_inset space ~
14916 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14917 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14918 \begin_inset space ~
14922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14924 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14929 If your document includes such material, use
14931 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14932 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14934 \begin_inset space ~
14938 \begin_inset space ~
14942 \begin_inset space ~
14950 \begin_inset space ~
14954 \begin_inset space ~
14960 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14961 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14964 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14966 \begin_inset Index idx
14969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14970 File formats ! LaTeX
14978 \begin_layout Standard
14979 This file type has the extension
14980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14991 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14993 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14994 it manually with console commands.
14995 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14996 you view or export your document.
14999 \begin_layout Standard
15000 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
15002 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15003 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15018 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
15019 \begin_inset space ~
15023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15025 reference "sub:Export"
15032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15034 \begin_inset Index idx
15037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15046 \begin_layout Standard
15047 This file type has the extension
15048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15068 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15069 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15070 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15074 \begin_layout Standard
15075 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15076 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15077 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15078 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15079 when you view the DVI.
15080 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15083 \begin_layout Standard
15084 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15086 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15087 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15092 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15093 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15095 \begin_inset space ~
15102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15112 The latter option uses the program
15121 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15122 font access (see section
15123 \begin_inset space ~
15127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15129 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15134 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15135 standard TeX processor.
15138 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15140 \begin_inset Index idx
15143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15144 File formats ! PostScript
15152 \begin_layout Standard
15153 This file type has the extension
15154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15166 PostScript was developed by the company
15170 as a printer language.
15171 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15173 PostScript can be seen as a
15174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15177 programming language
15178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15181 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15186 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
15192 \begin_inset Index idx
15195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15196 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
15206 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15209 \begin_layout Standard
15210 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15214 Encapsulated PostScript
15215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15218 (EPS, file extension
15219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15231 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
15232 to convert them in the background to EPS.
15233 If, for example, you have 50
15234 \begin_inset space ~
15237 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
15238 \begin_inset space ~
15241 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15242 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
15243 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15244 EPS to avoid this problem.
15247 \begin_layout Standard
15248 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15250 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15251 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15257 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15259 \begin_inset Index idx
15262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15269 \begin_inset Index idx
15272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15281 \begin_layout Standard
15282 This file type has the extension
15283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15299 Portable Document Format
15300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15307 was derived from PostScript.
15308 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15317 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15318 looks exactly the same.
15321 \begin_layout Standard
15322 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15326 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15330 (JPG, file extension
15331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15358 Portable Network Graphics
15359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15362 (PNG, file extension
15363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15375 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15376 background to one of these formats.
15377 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15378 will slow down your workflow.
15379 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15382 \begin_layout Standard
15383 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15385 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15391 \begin_layout Description
15393 \begin_inset space ~
15396 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15400 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15403 \begin_layout Description
15405 \begin_inset space ~
15412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15419 X) This uses the program
15423 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15428 is a new engine, derived from
15432 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15433 access (see section
15434 \begin_inset space ~
15438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15440 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15445 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15446 standard TeX processor.
15449 \begin_layout Description
15451 \begin_inset space ~
15458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15465 X) This uses the program
15469 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15474 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15475 font access (see section
15476 \begin_inset space ~
15480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15482 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15487 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15488 vertically written Japanese.
15491 \begin_layout Description
15493 \begin_inset space ~
15496 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15500 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15504 \begin_layout Description
15506 \begin_inset space ~
15509 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15513 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15514 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15518 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15519 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15522 \begin_layout Standard
15526 \begin_inset space ~
15535 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15536 works without problems.
15537 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15538 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15542 \begin_inset space ~
15549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15561 \begin_inset space ~
15568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15577 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15585 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15587 \begin_inset Index idx
15590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15591 FileFormats ! XHTML
15597 \begin_inset Index idx
15600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15609 \begin_layout Standard
15610 This file type has the extension
15611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15623 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15624 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15625 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15626 suitable for the purpose.
15627 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15629 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15630 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15633 between different formats, which are described in section
15635 Math Output in XHTML
15640 \begin_inset space ~
15648 \begin_layout Standard
15649 XHTML output remains
15650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15657 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15660 LyX and the World Wide Web
15664 Additional Features
15666 manual, for more information.
15669 \begin_layout Standard
15670 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15672 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15673 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15679 \begin_layout Subsection
15681 \begin_inset Index idx
15684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15693 \begin_layout Standard
15694 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15695 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15704 or use the toolbar button
15711 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15712 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15719 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15723 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15731 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15736 Further output formats can be selected via
15738 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15739 View (Other Formats)
15741 or the toolbar button
15742 \begin_inset Graphics
15743 filename ../images/view-others.png
15745 groupId toolbarbuttons
15752 \begin_layout Standard
15753 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15754 viewer window using the menu
15756 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15761 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15762 Update (Other Formats)
15767 \begin_layout Standard
15768 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15770 To have a real output, export your document.
15773 \begin_layout Subsection
15774 Printing the File from within LyX
15775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15777 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15784 \begin_layout Standard
15785 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15786 it directly from within LyX.
15787 To print a file, select the menu
15789 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15795 arg "dialog-show print"
15798 ) or click on the toolbar button
15801 arg "dialog-show print"
15805 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15806 This file is then processed by the program
15810 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15815 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15818 \begin_layout Standard
15819 You can set the following print parameters in the
15822 \begin_inset space ~
15830 \begin_layout Labeling
15831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15836 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15841 Note that this printer name is for the program
15850 has to be configured for this printer name.
15851 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15852 \begin_inset space ~
15856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15858 reference "sub:Printer"
15867 The printer should understand PostScript.
15870 \begin_layout Labeling
15871 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15876 The name of a file to print to.
15877 The output will be a PostScript file.
15878 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15882 \begin_layout Standard
15883 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15884 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15885 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15886 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15887 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15888 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15889 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15892 \begin_layout Section
15893 A few Words about Typography
15894 \begin_inset Index idx
15897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15906 \begin_layout Subsection
15907 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15908 \begin_inset Index idx
15911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15918 \begin_inset Index idx
15921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15930 \begin_layout Standard
15932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15943 character comes in four lengths: the
15955 , and the minus sign:
15956 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15962 \begin_layout Standard
15963 \begin_inset Tabular
15964 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15965 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15966 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15967 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15968 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15969 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15998 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16038 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16063 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16065 \begin_inset space ~
16068 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16075 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16100 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16102 \begin_inset space ~
16105 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16126 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16160 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16166 \begin_layout Standard
16167 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16179 character multiple times in a row.
16180 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16181 the final output, but not in LyX.
16183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16199 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16213 \begin_layout Standard
16214 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16215 math mode and has a length of its own.
16216 Here are some examples:
16219 \begin_layout Enumerate
16220 line- and page-breaks
16221 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16231 \begin_layout Enumerate
16233 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16243 \begin_layout Enumerate
16244 Oh — there's a dash.
16245 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16255 \begin_layout Enumerate
16256 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16260 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16270 \begin_layout Subsection
16272 \begin_inset Index idx
16275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16284 name "sub:Hyphenation"
16291 \begin_layout Standard
16292 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
16293 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
16298 \begin_inset Index idx
16301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16302 LaTeX-packages ! babel
16307 following the rules of the document language.
16310 \begin_layout Standard
16311 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16316 font and with unusual constructs, like
16317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16325 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16327 This is done with the menu
16329 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16330 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16332 \begin_inset space ~
16338 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16339 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16342 \begin_layout Standard
16343 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16344 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16354 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16362 as a hyphenation possibility.
16363 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16364 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16365 as described in section
16366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16369 Prevent Hyphenation
16370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16376 \begin_inset space ~
16384 \begin_layout Subsection
16386 \begin_inset Index idx
16389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16399 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16402 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16409 \begin_layout Standard
16410 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16411 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16412 LaTeX then adds the
16413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16416 appropriate amount of space.
16417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16420 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16422 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16423 gets after another word.
16426 \begin_layout Standard
16427 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16428 not work in all cases.
16430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16441 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16442 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16445 \begin_layout Standard
16446 Here are some examples of
16450 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16453 \begin_layout Itemize
16458 \begin_layout Itemize
16463 \begin_layout Standard
16464 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16467 \begin_layout Itemize
16469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16473 this is too much space!
16476 \begin_layout Itemize
16481 \begin_layout Standard
16482 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16485 \begin_layout Standard
16486 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16489 \begin_layout Enumerate
16493 \begin_inset space ~
16498 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16499 \begin_inset space ~
16503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16505 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16510 \begin_inset Index idx
16513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16514 Spaces ! inter-word
16522 \begin_layout Enumerate
16526 \begin_inset space ~
16531 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16532 \begin_inset space ~
16536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16538 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16543 \begin_inset Index idx
16546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16555 \begin_layout Enumerate
16559 \begin_inset space ~
16563 \begin_inset space ~
16567 \begin_inset space ~
16574 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16576 \begin_inset space ~
16581 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16582 This function is also bound to
16585 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16591 \begin_layout Standard
16592 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16595 \begin_layout Itemize
16597 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16601 \begin_inset space \space{}
16604 this is too much space!
16607 \begin_layout Itemize
16608 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16612 \begin_layout Standard
16613 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16614 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16615 will take care of this.
16618 \begin_layout Standard
16619 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16623 \begin_inset space ~
16628 feature described in the section
16634 Additional Features
16639 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16641 \begin_inset Index idx
16644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16645 Typography ! Quotes
16651 \begin_inset Index idx
16654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16685 \begin_layout Standard
16686 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16687 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16688 and use a closing quote at the end.
16690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16698 The keyboard character,
16702 , generates this automatically.
16705 \begin_layout Standard
16706 You can specify what character the
16710 key produces using the submenu
16716 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16720 \begin_inset Index idx
16723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16724 Document ! Settings
16734 There are six choices:
16737 \begin_layout Labeling
16738 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16761 \begin_layout Labeling
16762 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16765 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16769 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16775 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16779 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16785 \begin_layout Labeling
16786 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16789 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16793 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16799 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16803 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16809 \begin_layout Labeling
16810 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16813 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16817 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16823 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16827 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16833 \begin_layout Labeling
16834 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16837 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16841 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16847 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16851 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16857 \begin_layout Labeling
16858 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16861 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16865 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16871 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16875 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16881 \begin_layout Standard
16882 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16885 arg "quote-insert single"
16891 \begin_layout Subsection
16893 \begin_inset Index idx
16896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16897 Typography ! Ligatures
16903 \begin_inset Index idx
16906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16937 name "sub:Ligatures"
16944 \begin_layout Standard
16945 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16946 print them as single characters.
16947 These groups are known as
16952 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16954 Here are the standard ligatures:
16957 \begin_layout Itemize
16961 \begin_layout Itemize
16965 \begin_layout Itemize
16969 \begin_layout Itemize
16973 \begin_layout Itemize
16977 \begin_layout Standard
16978 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16981 \begin_layout Standard
16982 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16983 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16991 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17007 To break a ligature, use
17009 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17010 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17012 \begin_inset space ~
17019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17030 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17047 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17055 \begin_layout Subsection
17057 \begin_inset Index idx
17060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17069 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17076 \begin_layout Standard
17077 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
17078 characters in different sizes and positions.
17079 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
17080 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
17081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17100 \begin_inset Note Note
17103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17104 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
17105 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17110 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
17111 following proper names:
17114 \begin_layout Description
17115 LyX The name of the game, write
17116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17137 \begin_layout Description
17138 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
17139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17160 \begin_layout Description
17161 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
17162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17183 \begin_layout Description
17184 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
17185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17206 \begin_layout Standard
17207 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
17208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17212 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17220 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
17221 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
17222 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17225 : The actual version is
17226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17233 , the previous one was
17234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17244 \begin_layout Standard
17245 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17246 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
17247 In LyX this will look like
17248 \begin_inset Graphics
17249 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17255 \begin_inset Newline newline
17258 For more about TeX Code, see section
17259 \begin_inset space ~
17263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17265 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17272 \begin_layout Subsection
17274 \begin_inset Index idx
17277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17286 \begin_layout Standard
17287 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17288 space between two words.
17289 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17299 for units use the menu
17301 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17302 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17304 \begin_inset space ~
17312 arg "space-insert thin"
17318 \begin_layout Standard
17319 Here is an example to show the differences:
17322 \begin_layout Standard
17323 \begin_inset Tabular
17324 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17325 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17326 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17327 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17334 \begin_inset space ~
17338 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17350 space between number and unit
17357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17366 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17378 half space between number and unit
17391 \begin_layout Subsection
17393 \begin_inset Index idx
17396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17397 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17405 \begin_layout Standard
17406 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17408 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17409 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17410 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17411 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17412 These bits of text became known as
17423 \begin_layout Standard
17424 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17425 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17426 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17427 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17428 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17429 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17430 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17431 \begin_inset Newline newline
17439 \begin_inset Newline newline
17447 \begin_inset Newline newline
17450 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17451 Some LaTeX books (such as
17452 \begin_inset space ~
17456 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17458 key "latexcompanion"
17463 \begin_inset space ~
17467 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17473 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17477 \begin_layout Chapter
17478 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17481 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17488 \begin_layout Standard
17489 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17492 \begin_inset space ~
17498 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17501 \begin_layout Section
17503 \begin_inset Index idx
17506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17513 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17522 \begin_layout Standard
17523 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17526 \begin_layout Description
17528 \begin_inset space ~
17531 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17532 \begin_inset Newline newline
17536 \begin_inset Note Note
17539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17540 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17548 \begin_layout Description
17549 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17550 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17552 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17553 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17566 \begin_inset space ~
17572 \begin_inset Newline newline
17576 \begin_inset Note Comment
17579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17580 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17588 \begin_layout Description
17590 \begin_inset space ~
17593 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17594 set in the document settings under
17596 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17598 \begin_inset space ~
17604 \begin_inset Newline newline
17608 \begin_inset Newline newline
17612 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17621 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17622 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17627 of a comment that appears in the output.
17633 \begin_inset Newline newline
17637 \begin_inset Newline newline
17640 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17643 \begin_layout Standard
17644 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17652 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17656 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17659 \begin_layout Section
17661 \begin_inset Index idx
17664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17673 name "sec:Footnotes"
17680 \begin_layout Standard
17681 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17684 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17687 or the toolbar button
17690 arg "footnote-insert"
17702 \begin_inset Graphics
17703 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17712 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17741 label, the box will
17745 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17746 Clicking on the box label again will close
17759 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17760 and click on the footnote
17775 \begin_layout Standard
17776 Here is an example footnote:
17784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17785 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17793 \begin_layout Standard
17794 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17795 position where the footnote box is placed.
17796 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17797 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17798 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17799 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17804 ey are described in the
17807 \begin_inset space ~
17815 \begin_layout Section
17817 \begin_inset Index idx
17820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17829 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17836 \begin_layout Standard
17837 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17838 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17840 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17842 \begin_inset space ~
17847 or the toolbar button
17850 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17876 appearing within your text.
17877 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17886 \begin_layout Standard
17887 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17891 \begin_inset Marginal
17894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17896 This is a marginal note.
17904 \begin_layout Standard
17905 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17906 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17907 pages, right on odd pages.
17910 \begin_layout Standard
17911 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17914 \begin_inset space ~
17922 \begin_inset space ~
17930 \begin_layout Section
17931 Graphics and Images
17932 \begin_inset Index idx
17935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17942 \begin_inset Index idx
17945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17954 name "sec:Graphics"
17961 \begin_layout Standard
17962 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17963 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17966 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17971 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17975 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17978 \begin_layout Standard
17979 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17984 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17985 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17987 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17988 \begin_inset space ~
17992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17994 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18001 \begin_layout Standard
18006 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18007 of the image in the output.
18008 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18012 \begin_inset space ~
18016 \begin_inset space ~
18025 \begin_inset space ~
18029 \begin_inset space ~
18033 \begin_inset space ~
18038 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18039 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18047 \begin_layout Standard
18054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18062 \begin_inset space ~
18066 \begin_inset space ~
18073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18082 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
18083 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
18087 \begin_inset space ~
18092 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18093 with the image size is printed.
18097 \begin_inset space ~
18101 \begin_inset space ~
18105 \begin_inset space ~
18110 is explained in the
18113 \begin_inset space ~
18125 \begin_layout Standard
18126 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18127 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18129 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18132 \begin_layout Standard
18134 \begin_inset Graphics
18135 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18143 \begin_layout Standard
18144 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18145 the image into a float, see section
18146 \begin_inset space ~
18150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18152 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
18159 \begin_layout Subsection
18161 \begin_inset Index idx
18164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18173 name "sub:Image-Formats"
18180 \begin_layout Standard
18181 You can insert images in any known file format.
18182 But as we explained in section
18183 \begin_inset space ~
18187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18189 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18193 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18194 LyX therefore uses the program
18198 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18199 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18200 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18201 \begin_inset space ~
18205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18207 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18214 \begin_layout Standard
18215 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18218 \begin_layout Description
18220 \begin_inset space ~
18223 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18224 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18225 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18229 Graphics Interchange Format
18230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18233 (GIF, file extension
18234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18246 \begin_inset Index idx
18249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18281 Portable Network Graphics
18282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18285 (PNG, file extension
18286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18298 \begin_inset Index idx
18301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18333 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18337 (JPG, file extension
18338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18362 \begin_inset Index idx
18365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18396 \begin_layout Description
18398 \begin_inset space ~
18401 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18403 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18404 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18405 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18406 \begin_inset Newline newline
18409 Scalable image formats can be
18410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18413 Scalable Vector Graphics
18414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18417 (SVG, file extension
18418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18430 \begin_inset Index idx
18433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18465 Encapsulated PostScript
18466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18469 (EPS, file extension
18470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18482 \begin_inset Index idx
18485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18517 Portable Document Format
18518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18521 (PDF, file extension
18522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18534 \begin_inset Index idx
18537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18552 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18553 result will not be scalable.
18554 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18560 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18568 \begin_layout Standard
18569 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18576 \begin_layout Subsection
18577 Grouping of Image Settings
18578 \begin_inset Index idx
18581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18582 Images ! Settings grouping
18590 \begin_layout Standard
18591 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18593 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18594 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18596 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18597 need to manually change each of them.
18601 \begin_layout Standard
18602 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18605 \begin_inset space ~
18609 \begin_inset space ~
18624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18632 \begin_inset space ~
18636 \begin_inset space ~
18643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18653 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18654 and checking the name of the desired group.
18657 \begin_layout Section
18659 \begin_inset Index idx
18662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18678 \begin_layout Standard
18679 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18682 arg "tabular-insert"
18687 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18691 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18692 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18693 from the rest of the table.
18694 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18695 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18697 Here is an example table:
18700 \begin_layout Standard
18702 \begin_inset Tabular
18703 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18704 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18705 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18706 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18707 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18708 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18908 \begin_layout Subsection
18912 \begin_layout Standard
18913 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18916 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18920 This brings up the table dialog.
18921 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18922 cursor is placed currently.
18923 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18924 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18925 done on all of your selection.
18928 \begin_layout Standard
18929 In addition to the table dialog, the
18932 \begin_inset space ~
18937 helps you in setting table properties.
18938 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18941 \begin_layout Standard
18945 \begin_inset space ~
18950 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18951 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18952 current cell respectively.
18953 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18955 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18956 of text, see section
18957 \begin_inset space ~
18961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18963 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18970 \begin_layout Standard
18971 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18972 using the check box
18981 This will merge the cells to
18985 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18986 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18987 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18988 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18989 in the last row without the upper border:
18992 \begin_layout Standard
18994 \begin_inset Tabular
18995 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18996 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18997 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18998 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18999 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19000 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19011 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19020 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19096 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19131 \begin_layout Standard
19132 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
19133 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19134 explained in the chapter
19141 \begin_inset space ~
19147 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
19148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19151 degrees counterclockwise.
19152 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
19155 \begin_layout Standard
19156 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19164 Most DVI-viewers are
19168 able to display rotations.
19176 \begin_layout Standard
19181 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19186 adds lines for all cell borders.
19189 \begin_layout Subsection
19191 \begin_inset Index idx
19194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19195 Tables ! Longtables
19201 \begin_inset Index idx
19204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19213 \begin_layout Standard
19214 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19217 \begin_inset space ~
19221 \begin_inset space ~
19230 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19231 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19234 \begin_layout Description
19239 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19240 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19241 except for the first page, if
19244 \begin_inset space ~
19252 \begin_layout Description
19256 \begin_inset space ~
19261 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19262 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19265 \begin_layout Description
19270 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19271 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19272 except for the last page, if
19275 \begin_inset space ~
19283 \begin_layout Description
19287 \begin_inset space ~
19292 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19293 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19296 \begin_layout Description
19297 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19298 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19300 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
19304 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19307 \begin_inset space ~
19315 \begin_layout Standard
19316 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19317 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19318 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19324 In this context, first means first in this order:
19327 \begin_inset space ~
19339 \begin_inset space ~
19344 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19347 \begin_layout Standard
19349 \begin_inset Tabular
19350 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19351 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19352 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19353 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19354 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19355 <row endfirsthead="true">
19356 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19362 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19367 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19376 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19386 <row endfirsthead="true">
19387 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19398 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19407 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19419 <row endhead="true">
19420 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19431 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19440 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19450 <row endhead="true">
19451 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19462 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19471 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19483 <row endfoot="true">
19484 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19495 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19504 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19535 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20476 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20485 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20494 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20505 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20536 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20567 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20598 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20629 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20660 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20691 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20722 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20753 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20784 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20815 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20846 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20877 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20908 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20939 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20970 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21001 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21032 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21063 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21094 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21125 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21156 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21187 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21218 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21249 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21280 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21311 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21342 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21373 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21404 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21435 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21465 <row endlastfoot="true">
21466 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21477 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21486 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21503 \begin_layout Subsection
21505 \begin_inset Index idx
21508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21517 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21524 \begin_layout Standard
21525 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21526 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21527 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21528 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21532 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21535 \begin_layout Standard
21536 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21537 for the column in the table dialog.
21538 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21539 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21543 \begin_layout Standard
21545 \begin_inset Tabular
21546 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21547 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21548 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21549 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21550 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21570 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21639 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21695 This is longer now.
21700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21751 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21752 This is longer now.
21757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21783 \begin_layout Standard
21784 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21785 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21790 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21791 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21797 Selection with the mouse or with
21801 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21802 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21803 the selection from outside the table.
21806 \begin_layout Section
21808 \begin_inset Index idx
21811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21827 \begin_layout Subsection
21831 \begin_layout Standard
21832 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21833 have a fixed location.
21835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21842 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21850 \begin_inset space ~
21855 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21856 too many notes on the current page.
21859 \begin_layout Standard
21860 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21861 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21862 and pages without text.
21863 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21864 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21865 Floats are therefore numbered.
21866 Referencing is described in section
21867 \begin_inset space ~
21871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21873 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21880 \begin_layout Standard
21881 To insert a float, use the menu
21883 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21887 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21888 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21890 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21891 \begin_inset Index idx
21894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21900 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21901 paragraph within the float.
21902 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21903 by left-clicking on the box label.
21904 A closed float box looks like this:
21905 \begin_inset Graphics
21906 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21911 – a gray button with a red label.
21914 \begin_layout Standard
21915 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21916 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21919 \begin_layout Subsection
21921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21923 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21928 \begin_inset Index idx
21931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21932 Floats ! Figure floats
21940 \begin_layout Standard
21942 \begin_inset space ~
21946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21948 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21952 was created using the menu
21954 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21955 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21961 arg "float-insert figure"
21965 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21968 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21974 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21978 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21979 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21981 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21983 \begin_inset space ~
21991 arg "layout-paragraph"
21997 \begin_layout Standard
21998 \begin_inset Float figure
22003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22005 \begin_inset Graphics
22006 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22016 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22021 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22025 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22038 \begin_layout Standard
22039 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22040 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22042 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22051 ) and refer to it using the menu
22053 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22059 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22063 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22064 vague references like
22065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22072 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
22074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22082 For more about cross-references, see section
22083 \begin_inset space ~
22087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22089 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22096 \begin_layout Standard
22097 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22098 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22099 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22100 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22101 as described in section
22102 \begin_inset space ~
22106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22108 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
22114 \begin_inset space ~
22118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22120 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22124 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22125 You can also set the images one below the other.
22127 \begin_inset space ~
22131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22133 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22140 reference "fig:Platypus"
22144 are the subfigures.
22147 \begin_layout Standard
22148 \begin_inset Float figure
22153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22154 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22158 \begin_inset Float figure
22163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22164 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22169 name "fig:Undefinable"
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22182 \begin_inset Graphics
22183 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22194 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22198 \begin_inset Float figure
22203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22204 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22209 name "fig:Platypus"
22221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22222 \begin_inset Graphics
22223 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22235 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22242 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22247 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22251 Two distorted images.
22264 \begin_layout Subsection
22266 \begin_inset Index idx
22269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22270 Floats ! Table floats
22278 \begin_layout Standard
22279 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22281 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22282 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22285 or the toolbar button
22288 arg "float-insert table"
22292 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22293 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22294 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22296 \begin_inset space ~
22300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22302 reference "tab:Table-float"
22309 \begin_layout Standard
22310 \begin_inset Float table
22315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22316 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22321 name "tab:Table-float"
22333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22335 \begin_inset Tabular
22336 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22337 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22338 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22339 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22340 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22467 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22491 \end{array}\right]$
22499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22512 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22533 \begin_layout Subsection
22535 \begin_inset Index idx
22538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22547 \begin_layout Standard
22548 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22549 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22550 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22552 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22560 \begin_inset space ~
22568 \begin_layout Section
22570 \begin_inset Index idx
22573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22582 \begin_layout Standard
22583 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22585 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22586 \begin_inset space \space{}
22593 \begin_layout Standard
22594 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22596 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22600 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22601 and its alignment within the page.
22604 \begin_layout Standard
22606 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22616 height_special "totalheight"
22619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22622 This is a minipage.
22623 The text is set in an italic style.
22626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22629 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22630 another formatting.
22638 \begin_layout Standard
22639 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22642 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22646 as described in section
22647 \begin_inset space ~
22651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22653 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22658 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22664 \begin_layout Standard
22665 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22675 height_special "totalheight"
22678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22679 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22680 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22686 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22690 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22700 height_special "totalheight"
22703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22704 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22705 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22713 \begin_layout Standard
22714 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22720 \begin_layout Standard
22721 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22723 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22730 \begin_inset space ~
22738 \begin_layout Chapter
22739 Mathematical Formulas
22740 \begin_inset Index idx
22743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22750 \begin_inset Index idx
22753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22784 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22791 \begin_layout Standard
22792 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22797 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22800 \begin_layout Section
22802 \begin_inset Index idx
22805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22814 \begin_layout Standard
22815 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22828 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22830 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22831 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22832 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22834 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22840 \begin_layout Standard
22841 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22845 \begin_inset space ~
22850 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22853 \begin_layout Standard
22854 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22855 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22858 \begin_layout Standard
22859 This is a line with an inline formula
22860 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22866 \begin_layout Standard
22867 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22868 paragraph, like this one:
22869 \begin_inset Formula
22876 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22879 \begin_layout Standard
22880 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22881 For example, typing
22882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22895 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22896 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22900 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22903 \begin_inset space ~
22911 \begin_layout Subsection
22912 Navigating in Formulas
22913 \begin_inset Index idx
22916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22925 \begin_layout Standard
22926 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22927 achieved with the arrow keys.
22928 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22929 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22934 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22935 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22939 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22943 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22946 \end{array}\right]$
22954 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22959 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22960 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22963 \begin_layout Standard
22968 , printed in this document as
22969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22973 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22980 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22981 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22982 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22987 For example, if you want
22988 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22996 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23006 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23010 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23015 , since in the latter case only the
23018 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23023 will be under the square root sign:
23024 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23030 \begin_layout Standard
23031 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23033 \begin_inset Formula
23035 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23044 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23045 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23048 \begin_layout Subsection
23052 \begin_layout Standard
23053 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23054 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23058 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23059 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23060 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23061 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23062 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
23065 \begin_layout Subsection
23066 Exponents and Subscripts
23067 \begin_inset Index idx
23070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23077 \begin_inset Index idx
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23089 \begin_layout Standard
23090 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23093 arg "math-superscript"
23099 arg "math-subscript"
23102 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23104 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23107 , type in a formula
23110 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23120 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23126 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23130 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23136 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23142 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23151 , you have to use an extra
23155 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23156 For example, if you want
23157 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23163 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23169 Subscripts are similar: To get
23170 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23176 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23184 \begin_layout Subsection
23186 \begin_inset Index idx
23189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23198 \begin_layout Standard
23199 Create a fraction either with the command
23205 or by using the icon
23208 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23214 \begin_inset space ~
23220 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23221 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23222 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23227 To move back up, press
23232 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23233 \begin_inset Formula
23235 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23238 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23246 \begin_layout Subsection
23248 \begin_inset Index idx
23251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23260 \begin_layout Standard
23261 Roots can be created using the
23264 \begin_inset space ~
23272 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23278 arg "math-insert \\root"
23300 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23306 always produces a square root.
23309 \begin_layout Subsection
23310 Operators with Limits
23311 \begin_inset Index idx
23314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23321 \begin_inset Index idx
23324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23333 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23340 \begin_layout Standard
23342 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23346 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23349 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23350 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23351 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23352 The sum operator will automatically place its
23353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23360 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23362 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23366 \begin_inset Formula
23368 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23373 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23377 \begin_layout Standard
23378 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23380 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23381 behind the operator and using the menu
23383 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23384 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23386 \begin_inset space ~
23390 \begin_inset space ~
23404 \begin_layout Standard
23405 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23414 \begin_inset Index idx
23417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23424 \begin_inset Formula
23426 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23431 which will place the
23432 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23444 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23445 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23451 \begin_layout Standard
23452 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23459 Have a look at section
23460 \begin_inset space ~
23464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23466 reference "sub:Functions"
23470 for an explanation of function macros.
23473 \begin_layout Subsection
23475 \begin_inset Index idx
23478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23487 \begin_layout Standard
23488 Most math symbols can be found in the
23491 \begin_inset space ~
23496 under one of several categories; including
23513 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23517 \begin_layout Standard
23518 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23519 you don't have to use the
23522 \begin_inset space ~
23527 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23528 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23531 \begin_layout Subsection
23533 \begin_inset Index idx
23536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23545 \begin_layout Standard
23546 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23551 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23557 \begin_inset space ~
23565 arg "math-insert \\space"
23569 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23570 For example, the sequence
23575 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23579 \begin_inset Graphics
23580 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23585 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23586 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23587 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23588 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23590 Here are two examples:
23593 \begin_layout Standard
23603 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23609 \begin_layout Standard
23619 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23625 \begin_layout Subsection
23627 \begin_inset Index idx
23630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23639 name "sub:Functions"
23646 \begin_layout Standard
23650 \begin_inset space ~
23655 contains under the button
23658 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23661 a number of function macros, such as
23662 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23666 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23674 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23681 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23682 avoid confusions, because
23683 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23687 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23693 \begin_layout Standard
23694 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23696 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23700 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23706 \begin_layout Standard
23707 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23708 are placed, as described in section
23709 \begin_inset space ~
23713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23715 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23722 \begin_layout Subsection
23724 \begin_inset Index idx
23727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23736 \begin_layout Standard
23737 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23739 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23740 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23741 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23744 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23745 Our example is entered by typing
23750 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23757 \begin_inset space ~
23761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23763 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23767 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23770 \begin_layout Standard
23771 \begin_inset Float table
23776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23777 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23782 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23786 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23796 \begin_inset Tabular
23797 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23798 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23799 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23800 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23801 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23885 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23939 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23993 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24047 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24101 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24155 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24209 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24263 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24317 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24362 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24383 \begin_layout Standard
24384 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24387 \begin_inset space ~
24395 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24398 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24402 \begin_layout Section
24403 Brackets and Delimiters
24404 \begin_inset Index idx
24407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24414 \begin_inset Index idx
24417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24426 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24433 \begin_layout Standard
24434 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24435 For some purposes, using just the keys
24440 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24441 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24442 toolbar delimiter icon
24445 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24449 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24450 \begin_inset Formula
24452 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24460 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24461 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24465 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24468 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24474 \begin_inset Formula
24476 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24484 \begin_layout Standard
24485 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24486 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24490 \begin_layout Standard
24491 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24492 left side and right side.
24493 If you use the option
24496 \begin_inset space ~
24501 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24502 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24503 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24508 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24511 \begin_layout Standard
24512 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24513 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24514 is to go inside the brackets.
24515 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24520 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24521 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24522 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24526 arg "math-delim ( )"
24532 \begin_layout Section
24533 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24534 \begin_inset Index idx
24537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24544 \begin_inset Index idx
24547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24554 \begin_inset Index idx
24557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24558 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24566 \begin_layout Standard
24567 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24570 \begin_inset space ~
24578 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24582 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24583 Here is an example:
24584 \begin_inset Formula
24586 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24595 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24596 \begin_inset space ~
24600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24602 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24607 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24608 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24609 This alignment is set in the box
24614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24662 for every column as default.
24663 For example, the sequence
24664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24675 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24676 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24677 corresponds to the relevant column.
24678 The result will look like this:
24679 \begin_inset Formula
24682 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24683 column & has & has\, right\\
24684 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24693 \begin_layout Standard
24694 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24697 arg "newline-insert newline"
24700 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24701 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24703 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24706 or the math toolbar.
24709 \begin_layout Standard
24710 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24711 It can be created with the menu
24713 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24714 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24716 \begin_inset space ~
24728 Here is an example:
24729 \begin_inset Formula
24743 \begin_layout Standard
24744 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24747 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24750 arg "newline-insert newline"
24754 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24759 arg "newline-insert newline"
24762 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24770 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24771 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24772 A new row is created by every further entry of
24775 arg "newline-insert newline"
24779 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24780 Here is an example:
24781 \begin_inset Formula
24783 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24784 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24789 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24790 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24791 \begin_inset Formula
24793 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24801 \begin_layout Standard
24802 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24809 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24810 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24813 reference "eq:asquared"
24818 The other types are described in section
24819 \begin_inset space ~
24823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24825 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24832 \begin_layout Section
24833 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24834 \begin_inset Index idx
24837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24838 Math ! Formula numbering
24844 \begin_inset Index idx
24847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24848 Math ! Referencing formulas
24854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24856 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24863 \begin_layout Standard
24864 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24866 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24867 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24869 \begin_inset space ~
24873 \begin_inset space ~
24881 arg "math-number-toggle"
24885 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24886 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24887 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24888 the document class.
24889 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24890 separated by a dot:
24891 \begin_inset Formula
24901 arg "math-number-toggle"
24904 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24905 You can only number displayed formulas.
24908 \begin_layout Standard
24909 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24911 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24912 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24914 \begin_inset space ~
24918 \begin_inset space ~
24926 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24929 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24930 \begin_inset Formula
24933 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24939 To number all lines use the shortcut
24942 arg "math-number-toggle"
24948 \begin_layout Standard
24949 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24952 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24953 A label is inserted with the menu
24955 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24964 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24965 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24966 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24978 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24979 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24980 We inserted in the following example the label
24981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24988 in the second line:
24989 \begin_inset Formula
24991 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24992 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24997 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24998 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24999 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25001 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25003 \begin_inset space ~
25011 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25015 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25016 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25017 as the formula number:
25020 \begin_layout Standard
25021 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25024 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25031 \begin_layout Standard
25032 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
25033 \begin_inset space ~
25037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25039 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25044 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25052 \begin_layout Section
25053 User defined math macros
25054 \begin_inset Index idx
25057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25066 \begin_layout Standard
25067 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25068 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25069 Math macros are explained in section
25072 \begin_inset space ~
25084 \begin_layout Section
25088 \begin_layout Subsection
25090 \begin_inset Index idx
25093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25102 \begin_layout Standard
25103 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25104 To set a font in a formula, use the
25107 \begin_inset space ~
25115 arg "math-insert \\font"
25118 , or enter its command, listed in table
25119 \begin_inset space ~
25123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25125 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25132 \begin_layout Standard
25133 \begin_inset Float table
25138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25139 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25144 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25148 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25158 \begin_inset Tabular
25159 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25160 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
25161 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25194 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25221 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25248 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25281 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25308 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25335 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25369 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25396 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25430 \begin_layout Standard
25431 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25439 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25455 \begin_layout Standard
25456 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25457 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25462 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25463 space when you need a space in the box.
25464 Here is an example where
25465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25476 denotes the set of numbers:
25477 \begin_inset Formula
25479 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25487 \begin_layout Standard
25488 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25489 You can, for example, put a character in
25498 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25502 \begin_inset Newline newline
25505 So it is better not to use this feature.
25508 \begin_layout Standard
25509 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25510 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25514 \begin_inset Newline newline
25517 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25523 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25524 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25530 \begin_layout Standard
25537 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25540 \begin_layout Standard
25541 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25543 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25544 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25546 \begin_inset space ~
25554 \begin_layout Subsection
25556 \begin_inset Index idx
25559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25568 \begin_layout Standard
25569 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25571 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25575 \begin_inset space ~
25579 \begin_inset space ~
25587 \begin_inset space ~
25595 arg "math-insert \\font"
25599 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25600 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25601 Here is an example:
25602 \begin_inset Formula
25605 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25606 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25615 \begin_layout Subsection
25617 \begin_inset Index idx
25620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25629 \begin_layout Standard
25630 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25631 automatically chosen in most situations.
25649 For most characters,
25657 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25658 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25663 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25664 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25666 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25669 arg "math-insert \\style"
25673 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25674 For example, you can set
25675 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25678 , which is normally in
25687 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25691 The four styles are used in the following example:
25694 \begin_layout Standard
25695 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25699 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25703 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25707 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25713 \begin_layout Standard
25714 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25715 is set in a particular size with the menu
25717 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25719 \begin_inset space ~
25724 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25725 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25726 will be adjusted to correspond.
25727 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25738 \begin_layout Standard
25742 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25748 \begin_layout Section
25750 \begin_inset Index idx
25753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25760 \begin_inset Index idx
25763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25772 \begin_layout Standard
25773 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25774 (AMS) that are in common use.
25777 \begin_layout Subsection
25778 Enabling AMS-Support
25781 \begin_layout Standard
25782 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25783 the document by selecting the checkbox
25786 \begin_inset space ~
25790 \begin_inset space ~
25794 \begin_inset space ~
25801 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25805 \begin_inset Index idx
25808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25809 Document ! Settings
25817 \begin_inset space ~
25823 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25824 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25827 \begin_layout Subsection
25829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25831 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25836 \begin_inset Index idx
25839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25840 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25848 \begin_layout Standard
25849 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25850 LyX allows you to choose between
25871 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25872 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25878 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25881 \begin_layout Chapter
25885 \begin_layout Section
25887 \begin_inset Index idx
25890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25899 name "sec:Cross-References"
25906 \begin_layout Standard
25907 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25908 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25910 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25911 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25912 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25915 \begin_layout Enumerate
25919 \begin_layout Enumerate
25920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25922 name "enu:Second-item"
25929 \begin_layout Enumerate
25933 \begin_layout Standard
25934 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25936 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25939 or by pressing the toolbar button
25946 A gray label box like this:
25947 \begin_inset Graphics
25948 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25953 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25954 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25989 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25990 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26006 \begin_layout Standard
26007 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26009 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26012 or the toolbar button
26015 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26019 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26020 \begin_inset Graphics
26021 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26026 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26028 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26041 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26045 \begin_layout Standard
26046 As an alternative to
26048 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26051 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26056 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26057 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26059 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26071 \begin_layout Standard
26072 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26073 \begin_inset space ~
26077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26079 reference "enu:Second-item"
26086 \begin_layout Standard
26087 It is recommended to use a protected space
26091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26092 described in section
26093 \begin_inset space ~
26097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26099 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
26108 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26109 line breaks between them.
26112 \begin_layout Standard
26113 There are six formats of cross-references:
26116 \begin_layout Description
26117 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26120 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26127 \begin_layout Description
26128 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26129 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26141 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26148 \begin_layout Description
26149 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26150 \begin_inset space ~
26154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26155 LatexCommand pageref
26156 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26163 \begin_layout Description
26165 \begin_inset space ~
26169 \begin_inset space ~
26172 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26174 LatexCommand vpageref
26175 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26180 \begin_inset Newline newline
26183 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26184 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26185 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26186 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26187 it prints “on the next page”.
26188 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26191 \begin_layout Description
26193 \begin_inset space ~
26197 \begin_inset space ~
26201 \begin_inset space ~
26204 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26207 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26212 \begin_inset Newline newline
26215 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26221 ; otherwise it behaves like
26225 \begin_inset space ~
26229 \begin_inset space ~
26238 \begin_layout Description
26240 \begin_inset space ~
26243 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26244 \begin_inset Newline newline
26248 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26256 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
26265 \begin_inset Index idx
26268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26269 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
26275 \begin_inset Index idx
26278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26279 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
26290 \begin_inset Newline newline
26293 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
26296 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26300 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26301 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26309 is the default and preferred because
26313 supports only English documents.
26314 The format is specified by using the command
26326 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26327 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26340 ) can be done with this command
26341 \begin_inset Newline newline
26348 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26353 \begin_inset Newline newline
26356 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26358 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26360 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26367 \begin_layout Description
26369 \begin_inset space ~
26372 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26374 LatexCommand nameref
26375 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26382 \begin_layout Standard
26383 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26384 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26385 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26389 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26393 \begin_layout Standard
26394 You can only use the style
26398 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26402 is always possible.
26405 \begin_layout Standard
26406 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26407 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26409 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26410 \begin_inset space ~
26414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26416 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26423 \begin_layout Standard
26424 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26428 \begin_inset space ~
26432 \begin_inset space ~
26437 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26438 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26441 \begin_inset space ~
26446 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26447 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26450 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26456 \begin_layout Standard
26457 You can change labels at any time.
26458 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26459 do not need to think about this.
26462 \begin_layout Standard
26463 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26464 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26465 instead of the reference.
26468 \begin_layout Standard
26469 References are described in detail in the section
26470 \begin_inset space ~
26474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26484 \begin_inset space ~
26492 \begin_layout Section
26493 Table of Contents and other Listings
26494 \begin_inset Index idx
26497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26504 \begin_inset Index idx
26507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26514 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26523 \begin_layout Subsection
26525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26527 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26534 \begin_layout Standard
26535 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26537 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26538 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26540 \begin_inset space ~
26544 \begin_inset space ~
26550 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26551 If you click on it, the
26555 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26556 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26557 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26559 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26561 \begin_inset space ~
26566 that is described in section
26567 \begin_inset space ~
26571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26573 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26580 \begin_layout Standard
26581 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26582 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26584 \begin_inset space ~
26588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26590 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26594 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26596 \begin_inset space ~
26600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26602 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26606 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26608 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26611 \begin_layout Subsection
26612 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26615 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26622 \begin_layout Standard
26623 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26625 You can insert them via the
26627 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26631 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26634 \begin_layout Section
26635 URLs and Hyperlinks
26636 \begin_inset Index idx
26639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26646 \begin_inset Index idx
26649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26658 \begin_layout Subsection
26660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26669 \begin_layout Standard
26670 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26672 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26678 \begin_layout Standard
26679 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26680 \begin_inset Flex URL
26683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26693 \begin_layout Standard
26694 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26700 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26704 \begin_layout Standard
26705 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26713 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26721 \begin_layout Subsection
26723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26725 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26732 \begin_layout Standard
26733 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26735 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26738 or with the toolbar button
26745 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26754 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26755 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26756 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26758 name "LyX's homepage"
26759 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26763 , an Email address like this:
26764 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26766 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26767 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26772 , or a link to a file.
26775 \begin_layout Standard
26776 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26789 to the link target.
26792 \begin_layout Standard
26793 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26794 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26795 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26796 the text style dialog.
26797 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26801 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26803 name "LyX's homepage"
26804 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26811 \begin_layout Standard
26812 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26816 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26818 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26819 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26823 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26825 \begin_inset Newline newline
26833 \begin_inset Newline newline
26840 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26843 \begin_layout Section
26845 \begin_inset Index idx
26848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26857 name "sec:Appendices"
26864 \begin_layout Standard
26865 Appendices are created with the menu
26867 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26869 \begin_inset space ~
26873 \begin_inset space ~
26879 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26880 as the appendix part of the book.
26881 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26884 \begin_layout Standard
26885 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26886 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26887 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26888 and the subsection number.
26889 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26893 \begin_layout Standard
26895 \begin_inset space ~
26899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26901 reference "chap:Credits"
26906 \begin_inset space ~
26910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26912 reference "sub:Export"
26919 \begin_layout Section
26921 \begin_inset Index idx
26924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26933 name "sec:Bibliography"
26940 \begin_layout Standard
26941 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26942 You can include a bibliography database,
26946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26947 Known under the name
26948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26960 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26961 manually, using the paragraph environment
26965 , which was described in section
26966 \begin_inset space ~
26970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26972 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26977 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26978 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26982 use a bibliography database.
26985 \begin_layout Subsection
26986 The Bibliography Environment
26989 \begin_layout Standard
26994 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26996 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27005 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27007 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
27009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27016 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27019 \begin_layout Standard
27020 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27022 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27025 or the toolbar button
27028 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27032 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27033 containing the available citations.
27034 Select one or more keys from the list and
27044 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27045 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27049 \begin_layout Standard
27050 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27051 entry with surrounding brackets.
27056 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27057 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27069 \begin_layout Standard
27072 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
27075 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27077 key "latexcompanion"
27084 \begin_layout Standard
27085 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
27086 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27095 \begin_layout Standard
27096 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27099 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27101 \begin_inset space ~
27109 arg "layout-paragraph"
27113 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27116 \begin_layout Subsection
27117 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
27118 \begin_inset Index idx
27121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27122 Bibliography ! Databases
27128 \begin_inset Index idx
27131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27132 Bibliography ! BibTeX
27138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27140 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
27147 \begin_layout Standard
27148 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27154 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27156 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27157 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27162 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27164 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27165 your working field in a database.
27166 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27167 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27168 list for that document.
27169 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27173 \begin_layout Standard
27174 The database is a text file with the file extension
27175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27186 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27187 The format is explained in
27188 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27194 and in the LaTeX books (
27195 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27197 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27202 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27203 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27204 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
27205 \begin_inset Flex URL
27208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27210 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27218 \begin_layout Standard
27219 To use a database, use the menu
27221 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27226 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27239 \begin_inset space ~
27245 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27246 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27253 Add bibliography to TOC
27255 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27260 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27261 in the document or just the cited references.
27264 \begin_layout Standard
27265 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27277 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27278 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27279 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27281 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27287 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27288 \begin_inset Newline newline
27292 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27294 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27306 \begin_layout Standard
27307 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27310 \begin_layout Standard
27311 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
27312 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
27318 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27319 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27324 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27325 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27326 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27341 The following variants are possible:
27344 \begin_layout Description
27345 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27346 with other bibliography packages (e.
27347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27351 \begin_inset space \space{}
27358 ), only with the package
27362 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27366 \begin_layout Description
27367 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27368 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27369 with all bibliography packages, except
27374 \begin_layout Description
27375 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27380 , works with all bibliography packages
27383 \begin_layout Standard
27384 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27386 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27392 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27401 \begin_layout Standard
27402 When you select the option
27404 Sectioned bibliography
27408 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27409 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27412 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27413 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27415 Customizing Bibliographies
27423 Additional Features
27428 \begin_layout Standard
27429 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27430 the two methods of creating them.
27431 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27432 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27433 We used the style file
27437 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27440 \begin_layout Subsection
27441 Bibliography layout
27442 \begin_inset Index idx
27445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27446 Bibliography ! Layout
27454 \begin_layout Standard
27455 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27456 For this feature you need to enable the option
27462 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27466 \begin_inset Index idx
27469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27470 Document ! Settings
27480 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27481 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27482 in the previous section.
27485 \begin_layout Standard
27486 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27487 the citation reference window.
27488 Here is an example where the text
27489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27493 \begin_inset space ~
27497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27500 appears after the reference:
27503 \begin_layout Standard
27505 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27508 key "latexcompanion"
27515 \begin_layout Section
27517 \begin_inset Index idx
27520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27536 \begin_layout Standard
27537 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27539 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27541 \begin_inset space ~
27546 or the toolbar button
27553 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27554 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27555 by LyX as the index entry.
27558 \begin_layout Standard
27559 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27561 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27562 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27564 \begin_inset space ~
27570 A light blue box labeled
27571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27582 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27583 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27586 \begin_layout Standard
27587 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27588 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27590 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27592 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27599 \begin_layout Subsection
27600 Grouping Index Entries
27601 \begin_inset Index idx
27604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27613 \begin_layout Standard
27614 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27616 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27617 lists under the entry
27618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27626 First we create the entry
27627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27635 \begin_inset space ~
27639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27641 reference "sub:Lists"
27646 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27647 \begin_inset space ~
27651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27653 reference "sec:Itemize"
27657 , we insert the command
27660 \begin_layout Standard
27666 \begin_layout Standard
27670 \begin_layout Standard
27676 \begin_layout Standard
27677 for the enumerated list in section
27678 \begin_inset space ~
27682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27684 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27691 \begin_layout Standard
27692 The exclamation mark
27693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27700 marks the grouping levels.
27701 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27702 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27703 If we don't have an index entry for
27704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27711 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27714 \begin_layout Subsection
27716 \begin_inset Index idx
27719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27720 Index ! Page ranges
27728 \begin_layout Standard
27729 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27731 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27732 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27733 an index entry in section
27734 \begin_inset space ~
27738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27740 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27747 \begin_layout Standard
27750 Paragraph environments|(
27753 \begin_layout Standard
27754 and another entry at the end of section
27755 \begin_inset space ~
27759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27761 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27768 \begin_layout Standard
27771 Paragraph environments|)
27774 \begin_layout Standard
27776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27799 respectively start and end the index range.
27800 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27801 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27802 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27803 An example is the index entry
27804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27807 Document ! Settings
27808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27814 \begin_layout Subsection
27816 \begin_inset Index idx
27819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27820 Index ! Cross referencing
27828 \begin_layout Standard
27829 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27830 We referred for example in the index entry
27831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27839 \begin_inset space ~
27843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27845 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27849 ) to the index entry
27850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27857 in the same section using the entry
27860 \begin_layout Standard
27863 GIF|see{Image formats}
27866 \begin_layout Standard
27867 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27868 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27869 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27872 \begin_layout Subsection
27874 \begin_inset Index idx
27877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27878 Index ! Entry order
27886 \begin_layout Standard
27887 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27888 follow the rules for the index order.
27889 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27894 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27896 \begin_inset space ~
27900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27902 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27911 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27912 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27937 \begin_inset Index idx
27940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27941 Dummy entries ! maïs
27947 \begin_inset Index idx
27950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27951 Dummy entries ! maître
27957 \begin_inset Index idx
27960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27961 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27966 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27967 maïs, maison, maître.
27968 To achieve this, we use the command
27971 \begin_layout Standard
27974 previous entry@current entry
27977 \begin_layout Standard
27978 In our case we want to have
27979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27994 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27997 \begin_layout Standard
28003 \begin_layout Standard
28004 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28005 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
28006 See the next subsection for an example.
28009 \begin_layout Standard
28010 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28016 \begin_layout Standard
28017 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28022 to generate the index (see sec.
28023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28029 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28038 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
28040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28046 reference "sub:Document-Font"
28050 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
28051 index commands start with
28052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28064 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28069 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28072 \begin_layout Standard
28084 \begin_layout Standard
28096 \begin_layout Subsection
28098 \begin_inset Index idx
28101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28102 Index ! Entry layout
28110 \begin_layout Standard
28111 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28112 \begin_inset Index idx
28115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28118 This is an italic dummy entry
28123 You can also format the page number using the character
28124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28131 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
28132 We can write for example
28135 \begin_layout Standard
28138 italic page number:|textit
28141 \begin_layout Standard
28142 to get the page number in italic.
28143 \begin_inset Index idx
28146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28147 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28152 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
28154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28170 \begin_inset space ~
28176 Have a look at section
28177 \begin_inset space ~
28181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28183 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28187 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
28190 \begin_layout Standard
28191 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28199 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28203 to generate the index, see sec.
28204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28210 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28219 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28224 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28225 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28228 key "latexcompanion"
28240 \begin_layout Standard
28241 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28243 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28244 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28245 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28246 If so, put the following in the preamble
28249 \begin_layout Standard
28261 \begin_layout Standard
28265 \begin_layout Standard
28271 \begin_layout Standard
28272 in the index entry.
28273 \begin_inset Index idx
28276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28277 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28282 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28283 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28284 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28287 \begin_layout Standard
28288 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28289 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28290 a bold font for all index entries.
28291 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28303 documentation for details,
28304 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28306 key "makeindex,xindy"
28313 \begin_layout Subsection
28315 \begin_inset Index idx
28318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28327 name "sub:Index-Program"
28334 \begin_layout Standard
28335 If the index generation program
28339 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28343 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28352 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28353 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28354 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28355 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28356 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28366 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28367 dialog, see section
28368 \begin_inset space ~
28372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28374 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28379 The available options are listed and explained in
28380 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28382 key "makeindex,xindy"
28387 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28391 \begin_layout Standard
28392 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28393 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28396 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28397 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28401 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28402 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28405 \begin_layout Subsection
28409 \begin_layout Standard
28410 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28411 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28419 next to the standard index.
28420 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28421 that add this feature.
28427 \begin_inset Index idx
28430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28431 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28436 package to generate multiple indexes.
28437 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28442 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28443 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28450 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28451 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28452 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28460 \begin_layout Standard
28461 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28463 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28464 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28467 and select the option
28469 Use multiple Indexes
28476 already contains the standard index
28477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28485 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28486 also appear as a heading) to the
28490 input field and press the
28495 The new index now also appears in the list.
28496 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28500 \begin_layout Standard
28501 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28504 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28511 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28512 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28513 are additional features:
28516 \begin_layout Itemize
28517 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28518 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28521 \begin_layout Itemize
28522 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28523 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28531 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28532 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28533 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28534 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28537 \begin_layout Section
28538 Nomenclature/Glossary
28539 \begin_inset Index idx
28542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28549 \begin_inset Index idx
28552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28583 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28590 \begin_layout Standard
28591 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28592 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28593 called nomenclature or glossary.
28596 \begin_layout Standard
28597 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28603 \begin_inset Index idx
28606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28607 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28613 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28614 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28620 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28623 \begin_layout Standard
28624 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28625 and then use the menu
28627 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28633 \begin_inset space ~
28638 or the toolbar button
28641 arg "nomencl-insert"
28646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28657 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28660 \begin_layout Standard
28661 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28662 The first is the term or
28666 that you wish to define.
28671 of the term or symbol.
28674 \begin_layout Standard
28675 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28683 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28691 \begin_layout Subsection
28692 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28693 \begin_inset Index idx
28696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28697 Nomenclature ! Layout
28705 \begin_layout Standard
28706 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28710 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28716 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28724 \begin_inset Newline newline
28732 \begin_inset Newline newline
28738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28745 character starts/ends the formula.
28746 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28758 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28768 \begin_layout Standard
28769 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28770 \begin_inset space ~
28774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28776 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28783 \begin_layout Standard
28787 \begin_inset space ~
28792 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28793 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28798 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28805 in this document is:
28806 \begin_inset Newline newline
28811 dummy entry for the character
28816 \begin_inset Newline newline
28828 \begin_inset space ~
28838 font use the command
28867 \begin_layout Standard
28868 If the characters |
28869 \begin_inset space \space{}
28873 \begin_inset space \space{}
28877 \begin_inset space \space{}
28881 \begin_inset space \space{}
28885 \begin_inset space \space{}
28888 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28889 a quote character in front of them.
28890 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28891 LatexCommand nomenclature
28892 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28893 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28900 \begin_layout Subsection
28901 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28902 \begin_inset Index idx
28905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28906 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28914 \begin_layout Standard
28915 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28916 the symbol definition.
28917 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28919 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28922 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28923 LatexCommand nomenclature
28925 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28932 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28936 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28937 LatexCommand nomenclature
28940 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28945 They will be sorted by
28946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28972 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28975 will be sorted before the
28979 since the character
28980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28987 is considered in sorting.
28990 \begin_layout Standard
28991 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28994 \begin_inset space ~
28999 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29000 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29002 For the example given, you can insert
29006 in this field for the
29007 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29014 will be located before
29015 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29021 \begin_layout Standard
29022 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29027 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29036 \begin_layout Subsection
29037 Nomenclature Options
29038 \begin_inset Index idx
29041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29042 Nomenclature ! Options
29050 \begin_layout Standard
29055 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29056 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29059 \begin_layout Description
29060 refeq Appends the phrase
29061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29076 to every nomenclature entry, where
29082 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29085 \begin_layout Description
29086 refpage Appends the phrase
29087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29102 to every nomenclature entry, where
29108 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29111 \begin_layout Description
29112 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29115 \begin_layout Standard
29116 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29117 class options list in the
29119 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29123 In this document the options
29130 \begin_layout Standard
29131 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29137 \begin_layout Standard
29138 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29139 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29144 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29147 \begin_layout Description
29157 \begin_layout Description
29160 nomrefpage Like the
29167 \begin_layout Description
29170 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29179 \begin_layout Description
29183 \begin_inset space ~
29189 \begin_inset space ~
29194 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29197 \begin_layout Standard
29199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29206 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29207 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
29210 \begin_layout Standard
29218 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29221 \begin_inset Newline newline
29228 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29233 \begin_inset Newline newline
29237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29252 by their translation.
29255 \begin_layout Subsection
29256 Printing the Nomenclature
29257 \begin_inset Index idx
29260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29261 Nomenclature ! Printing
29269 \begin_layout Standard
29270 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29272 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29273 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29289 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29290 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29291 You can choose between these settings:
29294 \begin_layout Description
29295 Default a space of 1
29296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29302 \begin_layout Description
29304 \begin_inset space ~
29308 \begin_inset space ~
29311 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29314 \begin_layout Description
29315 Custom custom space
29318 \begin_layout Standard
29319 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29328 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29336 For example, in order to change the name to
29340 , add the following line to the preamble:
29343 \begin_layout Standard
29351 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29354 \begin_layout Subsection
29355 Nomenclature Program
29356 \begin_inset Index idx
29359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29360 Nomenclature ! Program
29366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29368 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29375 \begin_layout Standard
29376 LyX uses the program
29380 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29381 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29386 by adding options, see section
29387 \begin_inset space ~
29391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29393 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29398 The available options are listed and explained in
29399 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29401 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29408 \begin_layout Section
29410 \begin_inset Index idx
29413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29420 \begin_inset Index idx
29423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29424 Document ! Branches
29430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29432 name "sec:Branches"
29439 \begin_layout Standard
29440 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29441 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29442 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29443 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29446 \begin_layout Standard
29447 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29448 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29449 To create a branch, either select the menu
29451 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29452 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29455 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29457 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29464 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29465 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29466 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29467 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29468 (see below for an example).
29469 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29470 to the name of the other) and to add
29471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29483 \begin_inset space ~
29486 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29487 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29490 \begin_layout Standard
29491 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29492 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29494 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29497 where you can choose a branch.
29498 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29502 \begin_layout Standard
29503 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29504 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29507 \begin_layout Standard
29508 \begin_inset Branch Question
29511 \begin_layout Standard
29512 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29520 \begin_layout Standard
29521 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29524 \begin_layout Standard
29525 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29533 \begin_layout Standard
29540 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29541 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29544 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29545 Consider for example a file
29546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29553 which has the above branches.
29555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29562 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29586 branch were inactive,
29587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29602 branch was active, likewise
29603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29618 branch was active, and
29619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29622 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29626 if both branches were active.
29627 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29630 \begin_layout Standard
29631 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29637 \begin_layout Standard
29638 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29639 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29641 For example you can define for the question branch
29645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29646 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29647 \begin_inset space ~
29651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29653 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29665 \begin_layout Standard
29675 \begin_layout Standard
29685 \begin_layout Standard
29686 and for the answer branch
29689 \begin_layout Standard
29699 \begin_layout Standard
29709 \begin_layout Standard
29710 \begin_inset Branch Question
29713 \begin_layout Standard
29717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29745 \begin_layout Standard
29746 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29749 \begin_layout Standard
29753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29781 \begin_layout Standard
29782 Now it is possible to use the
29786 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29793 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29796 commands to obtain conditional output.
29797 Here is an example formula where only the
29804 \begin_inset Formula
29806 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29814 \begin_layout Standard
29815 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29823 \begin_layout Standard
29824 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29830 \begin_inset space \space{}
29833 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29834 For this advanced usage, see the
29839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29842 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29849 \begin_layout Section
29851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29853 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29858 \begin_inset Index idx
29861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29870 \begin_layout Standard
29873 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29874 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29877 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29879 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29884 \begin_inset Index idx
29887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29888 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29893 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29894 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29895 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29896 part of the document.
29900 \begin_layout Standard
29901 The header information in the dialog tab
29905 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29906 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29907 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29908 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29912 \begin_inset space ~
29916 \begin_inset space ~
29921 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29922 title and author entries.
29926 \begin_inset space ~
29930 \begin_inset space ~
29934 \begin_inset space ~
29939 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29942 \begin_layout Standard
29943 You can specify in the dialog tab
29947 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29952 \begin_inset space ~
29956 \begin_inset space ~
29960 \begin_inset space ~
29965 option allows long links to be split;
29968 \begin_inset space ~
29972 \begin_inset space ~
29976 \begin_inset space ~
29984 \begin_inset space ~
29989 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29992 \begin_inset space ~
29997 colors the different links.
29998 The default colors are:
30001 \begin_layout Labeling
30002 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30007 for hyperlinks and URLs
30010 \begin_layout Labeling
30011 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30019 \begin_layout Labeling
30020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30028 \begin_layout Standard
30029 but you can change these in the field
30034 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30037 \begin_layout Standard
30040 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30043 \begin_layout Standard
30048 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30049 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30050 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30053 \begin_layout Standard
30058 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30059 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30060 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30070 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30071 when opening the PDF.
30073 \begin_inset space ~
30076 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30077 \begin_inset space ~
30080 1 will only display the sections.
30083 \begin_layout Standard
30084 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30085 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30091 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30092 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30101 \begin_layout Section
30102 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
30103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30105 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30112 \begin_layout Subsection
30114 \begin_inset Index idx
30117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30126 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30133 \begin_layout Standard
30134 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
30135 constructs, but not all.
30136 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30137 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30138 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30139 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
30140 and their commands.
30143 \begin_layout Standard
30144 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
30146 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
30148 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30161 \begin_inset space ~
30166 or by the toolbar button
30179 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30187 \begin_layout Standard
30188 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
30189 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
30190 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30191 using the LaTeX-command
30197 , you can write the command part
30203 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
30207 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
30208 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
30209 the following example:
30212 \begin_layout Standard
30213 \begin_inset Graphics
30214 filename clipart/ERT.png
30222 \begin_layout Standard
30226 \begin_layout Standard
30227 This is a line with a
30231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30254 \begin_layout Standard
30255 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30263 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30264 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
30272 \begin_layout Subsection
30273 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
30274 \begin_inset Argument 1
30277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30284 \begin_inset Index idx
30287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30296 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
30303 \begin_layout Standard
30304 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30305 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
30306 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
30307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30315 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30316 any time if you know the right commands.
30317 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30318 is the end of the day.
30319 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30320 all caption labels bold.
30321 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30323 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30327 \begin_layout Standard
30328 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30329 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30330 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30332 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30341 \begin_layout Standard
30342 As result you find that the package
30347 \begin_inset Index idx
30350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30351 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30357 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30359 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30362 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30377 \begin_inset space ~
30385 \begin_layout Standard
30390 usepackage[options]{package name}
30393 \begin_layout Standard
30394 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30395 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30396 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30399 \begin_layout Standard
30400 In your case the package name is
30405 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30410 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30411 So you add the command
30414 \begin_layout Standard
30419 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30422 \begin_layout Standard
30423 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30428 For more commands provided by the
30432 package, have a look at its documentation,
30433 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30447 \begin_layout Standard
30448 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30450 For example if you use a
30454 class, you don't need the package
30458 , you can instead write
30461 \begin_layout Standard
30466 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30471 \begin_layout Standard
30472 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30473 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30474 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30481 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30484 \begin_layout Standard
30485 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30486 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30488 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30489 the previous section.
30492 \begin_layout Standard
30493 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30495 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30497 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30504 \begin_layout Standard
30505 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30511 \begin_layout Standard
30515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30525 \begin_inset Note Note
30528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30529 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30537 \begin_layout Left Header
30538 \begin_inset Argument 1
30541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30561 \begin_inset Note Note
30564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30565 defines the header line as described below
30573 \begin_layout Center Header
30574 \begin_inset Argument 1
30577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30586 \begin_layout Right Header
30587 \begin_inset Argument 1
30590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30611 \begin_layout Left Footer
30612 \begin_inset Argument 1
30615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30636 \begin_layout Center Footer
30637 \begin_inset Argument 1
30640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30651 \begin_inset Newline newline
30655 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30661 \begin_layout Right Footer
30662 \begin_inset Argument 1
30665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30687 \begin_layout Section
30688 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30691 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30696 \begin_inset Index idx
30699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30700 Document ! Header/Footer line
30706 \begin_inset Index idx
30709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30718 \begin_layout Standard
30719 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30723 \begin_inset space ~
30734 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30740 \begin_inset space ~
30746 As a second step add in the menu
30748 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30749 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30756 Custom Header/Footerlines
30757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30761 This module offers the following 6
30762 \begin_inset space ~
30768 \begin_layout Description
30770 \begin_inset space ~
30774 \begin_inset space ~
30778 \begin_inset space ~
30782 \begin_inset space ~
30786 \begin_inset space ~
30792 \begin_layout Description
30794 \begin_inset space ~
30798 \begin_inset space ~
30802 \begin_inset space ~
30806 \begin_inset space ~
30810 \begin_inset space ~
30816 \begin_layout Standard
30817 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30820 \begin_layout Standard
30821 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30822 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30824 \begin_inset space ~
30828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30830 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30834 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30837 \begin_layout Standard
30838 \begin_inset Float figure
30844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30847 \begin_inset Tabular
30848 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30849 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30850 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30851 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30852 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30854 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30872 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30883 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30901 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30912 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30916 The normal text on the page goes here.
30917 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30919 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30920 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30925 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30934 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30945 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30963 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30974 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30992 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31010 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31015 name "fig:Page-layout"
31019 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31032 \begin_layout Standard
31033 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31041 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31045 \begin_inset space ~
31050 is set to “Default”.
31051 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31060 \begin_layout Subsection
31064 \begin_layout Standard
31065 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31066 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31067 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31068 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31070 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31071 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31074 \begin_layout Standard
31075 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
31078 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31091 \begin_inset space ~
31099 \begin_layout Description
31102 thepage prints the current page number
31105 \begin_layout Description
31108 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31111 \begin_layout Description
31114 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31117 \begin_layout Description
31120 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31121 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31128 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31131 because it usually goes in a left header.
31134 \begin_layout Description
31137 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31138 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31140 It is normally used in the right header.
31143 \begin_layout Subsection
31144 Default header/footer
31147 \begin_layout Standard
31148 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31149 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31150 footer has the page number.
31151 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31152 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31153 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31156 \begin_inset space ~
31164 \begin_layout Subsection
31168 \begin_layout Standard
31169 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31170 Some pages are different.
31171 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31172 a new part or chapter in your book.
31173 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31174 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31175 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31178 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31179 Header and footer decoration line
31182 \begin_layout Standard
31183 By default, you get a 0.4
31184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31187 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31188 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31200 in the following way:
31203 \begin_layout Standard
31210 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31213 \begin_layout Standard
31214 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31223 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31230 \begin_layout Standard
31231 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
31232 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31233 \begin_inset space ~
31237 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31246 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31247 Several header/footer lines
31250 \begin_layout Standard
31251 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31252 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31253 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31255 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
31269 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31270 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31283 \begin_inset space ~
31291 \begin_layout Standard
31298 headheight}{height}
31301 \begin_layout Standard
31302 where height is a size in standard units.
31303 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31304 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31305 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
31307 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31324 \begin_inset space ~
31329 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31334 \begin_inset Index idx
31337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31338 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31344 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31345 for your header/footer.
31348 \begin_layout Subsection
31352 \begin_layout Standard
31353 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31354 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31355 This example consists of the following definition:
31358 \begin_layout Description
31360 \begin_inset space ~
31369 , empty optional argument
31372 \begin_layout Description
31374 \begin_inset space ~
31377 Header empty, empty optional argument
31380 \begin_layout Description
31382 \begin_inset space ~
31391 in the optional argument
31394 \begin_layout Description
31396 \begin_inset space ~
31405 in the optional argument
31408 \begin_layout Description
31410 \begin_inset space ~
31422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31426 \begin_inset Newline newline
31430 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31437 in the optional argument
31440 \begin_layout Description
31442 \begin_inset space ~
31451 , empty optional argument
31454 \begin_layout Description
31457 headrulewidth set to 2
31458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31464 \begin_layout Standard
31465 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31466 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31472 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31481 \begin_layout Standard
31482 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31488 \begin_layout Standard
31492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31496 pagestyle{headings}
31502 \begin_inset Note Note
31505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31506 switches back to page style with the default headings
31514 \begin_layout Section
31515 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31518 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31523 \begin_inset Index idx
31526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31533 \begin_inset Index idx
31536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31545 \begin_layout Standard
31546 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31547 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31548 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31551 \begin_layout Subsection
31555 \begin_layout Standard
31556 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31561 \begin_inset Index idx
31564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31565 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31570 (on some systems named simply
31575 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31577 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31583 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31584 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31592 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31593 automatically installed together with LyX.
31596 \begin_layout Subsection
31600 \begin_layout Standard
31601 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31602 LaTeX, activate the option
31605 \begin_inset space ~
31612 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31618 \begin_inset space ~
31622 \begin_inset space ~
31625 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31632 \begin_inset space ~
31645 \begin_inset space ~
31650 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31653 \begin_layout Standard
31654 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31658 \begin_inset space ~
31666 \begin_inset space ~
31674 \begin_layout Standard
31675 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31679 \begin_layout Standard
31680 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31688 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31689 generated by activating the option
31692 \begin_inset space ~
31698 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31706 \begin_layout Subsection
31707 Selected document parts
31710 \begin_layout Standard
31711 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31712 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31713 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31714 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31716 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31720 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31721 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31722 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31725 \begin_layout Standard
31726 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31732 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31743 is explained in section
31745 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31750 \begin_inset space ~
31760 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31761 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31763 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31765 Here is the result:
31768 \begin_layout Standard
31769 \begin_inset Preview
31771 \begin_layout Standard
31776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31780 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31786 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31796 height_special "totalheight"
31799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31824 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31830 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31852 \begin_layout Standard
31853 Previewing works also for colors.
31854 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31872 is explained in section
31879 \begin_inset space ~
31892 \begin_layout Standard
31893 \begin_inset Preview
31895 \begin_layout Standard
31899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31918 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31923 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31942 \begin_layout Standard
31943 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31949 \begin_layout Standard
31950 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31951 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31952 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31954 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31955 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31956 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31957 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31961 \begin_layout Subsection
31965 \begin_layout Standard
31966 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31969 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31971 \begin_inset space ~
31976 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31977 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31979 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31980 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31981 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31982 the source view window.
31987 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
31988 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
31989 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
31992 \begin_layout Section
31993 Advanced Find and Replace
31994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31996 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32001 \begin_inset Index idx
32004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32011 \begin_inset Index idx
32014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32023 \begin_layout Subsection
32027 \begin_layout Standard
32028 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
32029 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
32030 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32031 The key-features are:
32034 \begin_layout Itemize
32035 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32036 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32037 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32041 \begin_layout Itemize
32042 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32043 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32044 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32045 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32048 \begin_layout Itemize
32049 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32050 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32051 outside of mathematics environments
32054 \begin_layout Itemize
32055 Search may be widened to a specific
32060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32064 \begin_inset space ~
32067 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32068 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32075 \begin_layout Itemize
32076 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32077 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32082 \begin_inset space ~
32085 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32088 \begin_layout Subsection
32092 \begin_layout Standard
32093 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32095 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32108 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32111 ) or the toolbar button
32114 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32120 Advanced Find and Replace
32125 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32129 \begin_layout Standard
32134 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32138 \begin_inset space ~
32143 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32146 arg "paragraph-break"
32150 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32151 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32155 arg "paragraph-break"
32158 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32162 searches backwards.
32165 \begin_layout Standard
32169 \begin_inset space ~
32174 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32183 \begin_inset space ~
32188 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32191 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32192 Searching for mathematics
32195 \begin_layout Standard
32196 Mathematical formulas, such as
32197 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32200 or something more complex like
32201 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32204 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32209 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32210 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32211 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32212 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32218 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32222 \begin_layout Standard
32223 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32224 This is done by switching to the
32228 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32233 This way, entering in the
32240 \begin_layout Itemize
32241 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32242 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32245 \begin_layout Itemize
32246 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32247 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32250 \begin_layout Itemize
32251 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32252 of it only within section headings.
32253 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32254 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32258 \begin_layout Itemize
32259 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32260 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32267 \begin_layout Standard
32268 The entries made in the
32272 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32275 \begin_inset space ~
32281 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32285 button or alternatively press
32288 arg "paragraph-break"
32295 while the cursor is in the
32298 \begin_inset space ~
32306 \begin_layout Standard
32307 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
32308 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32312 \begin_layout Itemize
32313 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32314 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32322 with its typewriter version
32323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32337 \begin_layout Itemize
32338 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32344 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32356 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32363 (you may want to enable the
32366 \begin_inset space ~
32374 \begin_inset space ~
32379 options and disable the
32387 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32395 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32396 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32400 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
32403 , or occurrences of
32404 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32408 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32414 \begin_layout Subsection
32418 \begin_layout Standard
32419 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32424 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32426 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32428 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32437 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32443 This is done with the context menu
32445 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32446 Insert Regular Expression
32448 while the cursor is in the
32453 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32454 expression matching rules
32458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32459 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32461 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32465 \begin_inset space ~
32468 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32469 to match expressions.
32474 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32475 same text in the document.
32476 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32477 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32480 \begin_layout Enumerate
32481 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32486 editor the fraction
32487 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32491 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32494 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32495 fractions with the given denominator.
32498 \begin_layout Enumerate
32499 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32511 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32516 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32517 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32518 Also, by inserting a
32519 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32522 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32523 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32526 \begin_layout Standard
32527 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32528 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32529 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32532 , and referring back to them through
32533 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32537 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32541 For example, try searching with the regexp
32542 \begin_inset Newline newline
32545 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32548 \begin_inset Newline newline
32551 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32554 \begin_layout Standard
32555 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32558 \begin_layout Standard
32559 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32567 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32568 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32569 sub-expressions is absolute.
32571 \begin_inset space ~
32575 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32578 always refers to the first occurrence of
32579 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32582 in all entered regexps.
32590 \begin_layout Section
32592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32594 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32599 \begin_inset Index idx
32602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32611 \begin_layout Standard
32612 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32615 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32622 key or the toolbar button
32625 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32628 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32629 beginning of the currently selected text.
32630 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32631 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32632 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32633 scrolled so that it is visible.
32634 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32635 n, if any could be found.
32636 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32640 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32641 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32644 \begin_layout Standard
32645 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32648 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32652 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32653 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32654 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32655 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32658 \begin_inset space ~
32666 arg "dialog-show character"
32669 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32670 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32673 \begin_layout Standard
32674 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32675 \begin_inset Newline newline
32679 \begin_inset Flex URL
32682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32684 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32690 \begin_inset Newline newline
32694 \begin_inset space ~
32697 files for each language.
32698 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32699 \begin_inset space ~
32702 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32711 \begin_inset Newline newline
32714 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32715 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32716 but in most cases these are
32732 is the language code.
32735 \begin_layout Subsection
32739 \begin_layout Standard
32742 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32743 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32745 \begin_inset space ~
32748 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32751 you can set the following things:
32754 \begin_layout Description
32756 \begin_inset space ~
32759 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32760 Depending on your platform,
32774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32775 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32776 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32791 \begin_layout Description
32793 \begin_inset space ~
32796 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32797 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32800 \begin_layout Description
32802 \begin_inset space ~
32805 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32811 \begin_inset space \space{}
32815 This should normally not be needed.
32818 \begin_layout Description
32820 \begin_inset space ~
32824 \begin_inset space ~
32827 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32839 \begin_layout Description
32841 \begin_inset space ~
32844 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32845 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32846 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32847 appear in a context menu.
32848 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32852 \begin_layout Description
32854 \begin_inset space ~
32858 \begin_inset space ~
32862 \begin_inset space ~
32865 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32869 \begin_layout Section
32871 \begin_inset Index idx
32874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32883 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32890 \begin_layout Standard
32891 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32892 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32902 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32904 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32913 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32914 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32915 which are available for many languages.
32918 \begin_layout Standard
32919 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32923 \begin_layout Subsection
32924 Setting up the thesaurus
32927 \begin_layout Standard
32936 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32940 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32945 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32951 \begin_inset space ~
32959 For instance, the US English files are named:
32962 \begin_layout Itemize
32966 \begin_layout Itemize
32970 \begin_layout Standard
32979 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32980 and you just need to point LyX (in
32982 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32983 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32984 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32986 \begin_inset space ~
32991 ) to the path where they are installed.
32995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32996 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32997 ies, typical locations are
33003 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33007 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33011 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33014 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33020 LibreOffice-<Version>
33027 On the Mac, the default location is
33029 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
33030 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33031 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
33032 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
33033 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33034 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33042 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33043 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
33044 correct place right away.
33047 \begin_layout Standard
33048 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
33049 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33053 \begin_layout Itemize
33054 \begin_inset Flex URL
33057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33059 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33067 \begin_layout Standard
33068 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33069 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33071 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33072 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33073 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33075 \begin_inset space ~
33081 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33082 and point LyX there.
33085 \begin_layout Standard
33086 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33088 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33091 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33097 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33100 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33108 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33109 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33110 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33112 \begin_inset space ~
33117 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33120 \begin_layout Subsection
33121 Using the thesaurus
33124 \begin_layout Standard
33125 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33127 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33130 or the toolbar button
33133 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33136 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33138 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33140 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33141 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33142 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33151 ), related terms (such as
33154 \begin_inset space ~
33163 ), compounds (such as
33166 \begin_inset space ~
33175 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33184 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33187 \begin_layout Standard
33188 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33189 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33193 \begin_layout Standard
33194 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33195 the dictionary, such as the above
33199 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33204 \begin_inset space \space{}
33207 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33208 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33209 For example, looking up the word form
33213 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33218 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33223 \begin_inset space \space{}
33234 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33235 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33236 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33239 \begin_layout Section
33241 \begin_inset Index idx
33244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33251 \begin_inset Index idx
33254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33255 Document ! Change Tracking
33261 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33263 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33270 \begin_layout Standard
33271 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33272 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33273 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33274 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33276 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33278 \begin_inset space ~
33281 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33283 \begin_inset space ~
33291 \begin_layout Standard
33292 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33306 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33307 You can change the color in
33309 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33310 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33312 \begin_inset space ~
33316 \begin_inset space ~
33321 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33327 \begin_inset Index idx
33330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33331 Color ! Change tracking
33336 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33337 the cursor is in changed text.
33338 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33341 arg "changes-merge"
33347 \begin_layout Standard
33348 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33349 \begin_inset Index idx
33352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33361 \begin_layout Standard
33362 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33368 \begin_layout Standard
33369 \begin_inset Graphics
33370 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33378 \begin_layout Standard
33379 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33385 \begin_layout Standard
33386 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33389 \begin_layout Standard
33390 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33396 \begin_layout Standard
33397 \begin_inset Tabular
33398 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33399 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33400 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33401 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33402 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33411 arg "changes-track"
33419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33425 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33427 \begin_inset space ~
33430 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33432 \begin_inset space ~
33441 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33450 arg "changes-output"
33458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33464 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33466 \begin_inset space ~
33469 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33471 \begin_inset space ~
33475 \begin_inset space ~
33479 \begin_inset space ~
33488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33509 Jumps to the next change
33515 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33524 arg "change-accept"
33532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33538 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33540 \begin_inset space ~
33543 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33545 \begin_inset space ~
33554 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33563 arg "change-reject"
33571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33577 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33579 \begin_inset space ~
33582 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33584 \begin_inset space ~
33593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33602 arg "changes-merge"
33610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33616 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33618 \begin_inset space ~
33621 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33623 \begin_inset space ~
33632 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33641 arg "all-changes-accept"
33649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33655 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33657 \begin_inset space ~
33660 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33662 \begin_inset space ~
33666 \begin_inset space ~
33675 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33684 arg "all-changes-reject"
33692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33698 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33700 \begin_inset space ~
33703 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33705 \begin_inset space ~
33709 \begin_inset space ~
33718 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33741 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33742 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33755 \begin_inset space ~
33764 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33787 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33789 \begin_inset space ~
33805 \begin_layout Standard
33806 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33812 \begin_layout Standard
33813 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33833 \begin_layout Standard
33834 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33835 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33836 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33837 the next change after the current cursor position.
33838 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33839 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33840 step to the next change.
33841 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33844 \begin_layout Standard
33845 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33846 to describe a change.
33849 \begin_layout Standard
33850 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33855 \begin_inset Index idx
33858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33859 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33865 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33866 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33872 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33875 \begin_layout Section
33876 Comparison of Documents
33877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33879 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33884 \begin_inset Index idx
33887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33888 Comparison of documents
33896 \begin_layout Standard
33897 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33899 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33903 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33905 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33906 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33910 \begin_inset space ~
33914 \begin_inset space ~
33918 \begin_inset space ~
33927 \begin_inset space ~
33931 \begin_inset space ~
33935 \begin_inset space ~
33939 \begin_inset space ~
33943 \begin_inset space ~
33947 \begin_inset space ~
33952 enables the change tracking option
33955 \begin_inset space ~
33959 \begin_inset space ~
33963 \begin_inset space ~
33968 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33971 \begin_layout Section
33972 International Support
33973 \begin_inset Index idx
33976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33977 International support
33985 \begin_layout Standard
33986 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33987 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33988 up LyX to use them:
33989 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33991 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33998 \begin_layout Standard
33999 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34000 \begin_inset space ~
34004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34006 reference "sub:Special-Character"
34013 \begin_layout Subsection
34015 \begin_inset Index idx
34018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34025 \begin_inset Index idx
34028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34029 Document ! Settings
34035 \begin_inset Index idx
34038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34039 Document ! Language
34047 \begin_layout Standard
34050 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34051 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34054 dialog lets you set
34056 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34061 \begin_layout Standard
34066 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
34070 \begin_inset space ~
34075 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34076 For details about the different encoding options see section
34077 \begin_inset space ~
34081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34083 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34090 \begin_layout Subsection
34091 Keyboard mapping configuration
34092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34094 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
34101 \begin_layout Standard
34102 If you have for example a U.
34103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34106 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34107 can use an alternate keymap.
34108 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
34109 use an Italian keymap.
34112 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34113 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34114 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34117 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34118 \begin_inset space ~
34122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34124 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
34129 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34130 which one you want to use.
34133 \begin_layout Standard
34134 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34135 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34136 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34140 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34141 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34142 one to support the characters you want.
34143 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34150 \begin_layout Chapter
34153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34155 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34162 \begin_layout Standard
34163 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34164 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34165 topic inside the user's guide.
34168 \begin_layout Section
34170 \begin_inset Index idx
34173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34182 \begin_layout Standard
34187 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34190 \begin_layout Subsection
34194 \begin_layout Standard
34195 Creates a new document.
34198 \begin_layout Subsection
34202 \begin_layout Standard
34203 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34204 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34205 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34208 \begin_layout Subsection
34212 \begin_layout Standard
34216 \begin_layout Subsection
34220 \begin_layout Standard
34221 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34222 Click there on a file to open it.
34225 \begin_layout Subsection
34229 \begin_layout Standard
34230 Closes the current document.
34233 \begin_layout Subsection
34237 \begin_layout Standard
34238 Closes all opened documents.
34241 \begin_layout Subsection
34245 \begin_layout Standard
34246 Saves the actual document.
34249 \begin_layout Subsection
34253 \begin_layout Standard
34254 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34257 \begin_layout Subsection
34261 \begin_layout Standard
34262 Saves all opened documents.
34265 \begin_layout Subsection
34269 \begin_layout Standard
34270 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34273 \begin_layout Subsection
34277 \begin_layout Standard
34278 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34279 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34280 It is described in the section
34282 Version Control in LyX
34286 Additional Features
34291 \begin_layout Subsection
34295 \begin_layout Standard
34296 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
34297 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
34299 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
34302 \begin_layout Standard
34303 When using the menu entry
34306 \begin_inset space ~
34311 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34315 \begin_inset space ~
34319 \begin_inset space ~
34323 \begin_inset space ~
34328 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34329 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34332 \begin_layout Subsection
34334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34343 \begin_layout Standard
34344 You can export your document to various file formats.
34345 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34346 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34347 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34350 \begin_layout Standard
34351 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34353 \begin_inset space ~
34357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34359 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34366 \begin_layout Description
34372 \begin_inset space ~
34379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34386 yX format of the special LyX
34387 \begin_inset space ~
34390 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34391 \begin_inset Newline newline
34394 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34397 \begin_layout Description
34398 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34404 \begin_layout Description
34406 \begin_inset space ~
34409 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34415 \begin_layout Description
34416 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34417 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34418 files paths or file names in your document.
34419 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34426 \begin_layout Description
34427 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34428 in files paths or file names
34431 \begin_layout Description
34433 \begin_inset space ~
34440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34447 eX) DVI-format using the program
34451 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34454 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34462 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34470 \begin_layout Description
34472 \begin_inset space ~
34475 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34479 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34484 \begin_layout Description
34485 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34489 \begin_layout Description
34491 \begin_inset space ~
34495 \begin_inset space ~
34498 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34502 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34510 \begin_layout Description
34517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34525 \begin_inset space ~
34536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34549 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34554 \begin_layout Description
34561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34569 \begin_inset space ~
34574 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34575 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34579 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34582 \begin_layout Description
34589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34597 \begin_inset space ~
34602 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34603 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34611 \begin_layout Description
34618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34626 \begin_inset space ~
34637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34650 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34655 \begin_layout Description
34657 \begin_inset space ~
34661 \begin_inset space ~
34670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34679 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34680 music notation software
34685 \begin_layout Description
34692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34702 \begin_inset space ~
34706 \begin_inset space ~
34709 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34710 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34711 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34714 \begin_layout Description
34721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34731 \begin_inset space ~
34734 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34750 represent the version number)
34753 \begin_layout Description
34760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34769 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34772 \begin_layout Description
34773 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34778 \begin_layout Description
34779 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34781 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34784 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34788 \begin_layout Description
34792 \begin_inset space ~
34797 PDF-format using the program
34801 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34804 \begin_layout Description
34808 \begin_inset space ~
34815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34824 PDF-format using the program
34828 , produces PDF-files directly
34831 \begin_layout Description
34835 \begin_inset space ~
34840 PDF-format using the program
34844 , produces PDF-files directly
34847 \begin_layout Description
34851 \begin_inset space ~
34856 PDF-format using the program
34860 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34863 \begin_layout Description
34867 \begin_inset space ~
34874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34883 PDF-format using the program
34887 , produces PDF-files directly
34890 \begin_layout Description
34894 \begin_inset space ~
34902 \begin_layout Description
34906 \begin_inset space ~
34910 \begin_inset space ~
34915 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34916 and then exported as text using the program
34921 \begin_layout Description
34926 PostScript format using the program
34931 \begin_layout Description
34932 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34933 programming language
34946 it is possible to use
34953 \begin_layout Standard
34954 If one of the menu entries
34961 \begin_inset space ~
34970 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34971 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34972 \begin_inset space ~
34976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34978 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34983 \begin_inset Index idx
34986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34987 Reconfiguration of LyX
34995 \begin_layout Subsection
34999 \begin_layout Standard
35000 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
35001 format or send it to a printer.
35002 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
35003 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
35009 For more information have a look at section
35010 \begin_inset space ~
35014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35016 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
35023 \begin_layout Subsection
35027 \begin_layout Standard
35028 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35029 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
35030 prefix, see section
35031 \begin_inset space ~
35035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35037 reference "sec:Paths"
35042 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35051 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35052 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
35053 \begin_inset space ~
35057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35059 reference "sub:Converters"
35066 \begin_layout Subsection
35067 New and Close Window
35070 \begin_layout Standard
35071 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
35074 \begin_layout Subsection
35078 \begin_layout Standard
35079 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35082 \begin_layout Section
35084 \begin_inset Index idx
35087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35096 \begin_layout Subsection
35100 \begin_layout Standard
35101 Described in section
35102 \begin_inset space ~
35106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35108 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35115 \begin_layout Subsection
35116 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35119 \begin_layout Standard
35120 Described in section
35121 \begin_inset space ~
35125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35127 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35134 \begin_layout Subsection
35138 \begin_layout Standard
35139 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35140 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35143 \begin_layout Subsection
35147 \begin_layout Standard
35148 Selects the whole document.
35151 \begin_layout Subsection
35152 Find & Replace (Quick)
35155 \begin_layout Standard
35156 Described in section
35157 \begin_inset space ~
35161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35163 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35170 \begin_layout Subsection
35171 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35174 \begin_layout Standard
35175 Described in section
35176 \begin_inset space ~
35180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35182 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35189 \begin_layout Subsection
35190 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35193 \begin_layout Standard
35194 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35198 \begin_layout Subsection
35202 \begin_layout Standard
35203 Described in section
35204 \begin_inset space ~
35208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35210 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35217 \begin_layout Subsection
35219 \begin_inset Index idx
35222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35223 Paragraph ! Settings
35231 \begin_layout Standard
35232 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35233 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35237 \begin_layout Standard
35238 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35239 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35245 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35246 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35248 \begin_inset space ~
35256 \begin_layout Subsection
35260 \begin_layout Standard
35261 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35262 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35263 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35267 \begin_layout Standard
35268 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35270 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35271 The properties of tables are described in section
35272 \begin_inset space ~
35276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35278 reference "sec:Tables"
35282 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35283 \begin_inset space ~
35287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35289 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35296 \begin_layout Subsection
35297 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35300 \begin_layout Standard
35301 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
35303 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35304 \begin_inset space ~
35308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35310 reference "sec:Nesting"
35315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35317 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35324 \begin_layout Section
35326 \begin_inset Index idx
35329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35338 \begin_layout Standard
35339 At the bottom of the
35343 menu the opened documents are listed.
35346 \begin_layout Subsection
35347 Open/Close all Insets
35350 \begin_layout Standard
35351 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35354 \begin_layout Subsection
35355 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35358 \begin_layout Standard
35359 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35362 \begin_layout Standard
35363 Math macros are described in the
35370 \begin_layout Subsection
35374 \begin_layout Standard
35375 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35376 \begin_inset space ~
35380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35382 reference "sec:Navigating"
35387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35389 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35396 \begin_layout Subsection
35400 \begin_layout Standard
35401 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35403 \begin_inset space ~
35407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35409 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35416 \begin_layout Subsection
35420 \begin_layout Standard
35421 Opens a window showing console messages.
35422 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35426 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35427 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35430 \begin_layout Subsection
35432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35434 name "sub:Toolbars"
35439 \begin_inset Index idx
35442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35451 \begin_layout Standard
35452 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35453 All toolbars and the
35456 \begin_inset space ~
35461 can be turned on and off.
35466 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35478 \begin_inset space ~
35490 \begin_inset space ~
35495 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35499 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35506 \begin_layout Standard
35511 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35515 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35516 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35517 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35518 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35519 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35522 \begin_layout Standard
35523 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35524 \begin_inset space ~
35528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35530 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35537 \begin_layout Subsection
35541 \begin_layout Standard
35545 \begin_inset space ~
35549 \begin_inset space ~
35553 \begin_inset space ~
35557 \begin_inset space ~
35561 \begin_inset space ~
35565 \begin_inset space ~
35570 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35573 \begin_inset space ~
35577 \begin_inset space ~
35581 \begin_inset space ~
35585 \begin_inset space ~
35589 \begin_inset space ~
35593 \begin_inset space ~
35598 will split it horizontally.
35599 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35600 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35601 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35602 three or more documents at the same time.
35603 To close a split view, use the menu
35606 \begin_inset space ~
35610 \begin_inset space ~
35618 \begin_layout Subsection
35622 \begin_layout Standard
35623 Closes a split view.
35626 \begin_layout Subsection
35630 \begin_layout Standard
35631 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35632 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35633 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35634 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35635 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35638 \begin_layout Section
35640 \begin_inset Index idx
35643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35652 \begin_layout Subsection
35656 \begin_layout Standard
35657 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35658 \begin_inset space ~
35662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35664 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35675 \begin_layout Subsection
35677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35679 name "sub:Special-Character"
35686 \begin_layout Standard
35687 Here you can insert the following characters:
35690 \begin_layout Description
35695 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35697 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35698 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35699 You can get a complete display by checking
35702 \begin_inset space ~
35708 \begin_inset Newline newline
35712 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35720 Not all characters will be visible in the
35724 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35732 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35736 ) can display every character.
35744 \begin_layout Description
35745 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35749 \begin_layout Description
35751 \begin_inset space ~
35755 \begin_inset space ~
35758 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35759 \begin_inset space ~
35763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35765 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35772 \begin_layout Description
35774 \begin_inset space ~
35777 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35780 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35781 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35787 \begin_layout Description
35789 \begin_inset space ~
35792 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35795 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35796 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35802 \begin_layout Description
35804 \begin_inset space ~
35807 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35811 \begin_layout Description
35813 \begin_inset space ~
35816 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35820 \begin_layout Description
35822 \begin_inset space ~
35825 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35831 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35837 \begin_layout Description
35839 \begin_inset space ~
35842 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35846 \begin_layout Description
35848 \begin_inset space ~
35852 \begin_inset Index idx
35855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35862 \begin_inset Index idx
35865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35866 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35871 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35872 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35874 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35879 \begin_inset Index idx
35882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35883 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35889 \begin_inset Newline newline
35892 More information about this feature can be found in the
35898 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35904 \begin_layout Subsection
35908 \begin_layout Standard
35909 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35912 \begin_layout Description
35913 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35914 \begin_inset script superscript
35916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35925 \begin_layout Description
35926 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35927 \begin_inset script subscript
35929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35938 \begin_layout Description
35940 \begin_inset space ~
35943 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35944 \begin_inset space ~
35948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35950 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35957 \begin_layout Description
35959 \begin_inset space ~
35962 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35963 \begin_inset space ~
35967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35969 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35976 \begin_layout Description
35978 \begin_inset space ~
35981 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35982 \begin_inset space ~
35986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35988 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35995 \begin_layout Description
35997 \begin_inset space ~
36000 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36006 \begin_inset space \space{}
36009 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36010 An example from the LyX
36015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36018 To insert a fraction use the command
36023 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36027 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36036 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36043 \begin_layout Description
36045 \begin_inset space ~
36048 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36049 \begin_inset space ~
36053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36055 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
36062 \begin_layout Description
36064 \begin_inset space ~
36067 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36068 \begin_inset space ~
36072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36074 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
36081 \begin_layout Description
36083 \begin_inset space ~
36086 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36087 \begin_inset space ~
36091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36093 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
36100 \begin_layout Description
36101 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36102 \begin_inset space ~
36106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36108 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
36115 \begin_layout Description
36117 \begin_inset space ~
36120 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36121 \begin_inset space ~
36125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36127 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
36134 \begin_layout Description
36136 \begin_inset space ~
36139 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36140 \begin_inset space ~
36144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36146 reference "sub:Ligatures"
36153 \begin_layout Description
36155 \begin_inset space ~
36159 \begin_inset space ~
36162 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36163 \begin_inset space ~
36167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36169 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36176 \begin_layout Description
36178 \begin_inset space ~
36181 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36182 as described in section
36183 \begin_inset space ~
36187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36189 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36196 \begin_layout Description
36198 \begin_inset space ~
36201 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36202 \begin_inset space ~
36206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36208 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36215 \begin_layout Description
36217 \begin_inset space ~
36220 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36221 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36223 \begin_inset space ~
36227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36229 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36236 \begin_layout Description
36238 \begin_inset space ~
36241 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36242 \begin_inset space ~
36246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36248 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36255 \begin_layout Description
36257 \begin_inset space ~
36261 \begin_inset space ~
36264 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36265 \begin_inset space ~
36269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36271 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36278 \begin_layout Subsection
36282 \begin_layout Standard
36283 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36287 \begin_inset space ~
36308 are described in section
36309 \begin_inset space ~
36313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36315 reference "sec:toc"
36324 is described in section
36325 \begin_inset space ~
36329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36331 reference "sec:Index"
36339 is described in section
36340 \begin_inset space ~
36344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36346 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36352 BibTeX Bibliography
36354 is described in section
36355 \begin_inset space ~
36359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36361 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36368 \begin_layout Subsection
36372 \begin_layout Standard
36373 To insert floats, as described in section
36374 \begin_inset space ~
36378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36380 reference "sec:Floats"
36384 and in detail the chapter
36391 \begin_inset space ~
36399 \begin_layout Subsection
36403 \begin_layout Standard
36404 To insert notes, described in section
36405 \begin_inset space ~
36409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36411 reference "sec:Notes"
36418 \begin_layout Subsection
36422 \begin_layout Standard
36423 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36425 Branches are described in section
36426 \begin_inset space ~
36430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36432 reference "sec:Branches"
36439 \begin_layout Subsection
36443 \begin_layout Standard
36444 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36445 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36447 An example is the document class
36448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36455 with three custom insets.
36458 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36462 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36468 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36471 \begin_layout Subsection
36473 \begin_inset Index idx
36476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36485 \begin_layout Standard
36486 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36488 For more information see chapter
36490 External Document Parts
36493 \begin_inset space ~
36499 \begin_layout Subsection
36501 \begin_inset Index idx
36504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36513 \begin_layout Standard
36514 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36515 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36522 \begin_inset space ~
36530 \begin_layout Subsection
36534 \begin_layout Standard
36539 dialog as described in section
36540 \begin_inset space ~
36544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36546 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36553 \begin_layout Subsection
36557 \begin_layout Standard
36562 as described in section
36563 \begin_inset space ~
36567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36569 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36576 \begin_layout Subsection
36580 \begin_layout Standard
36585 as described in section
36586 \begin_inset space ~
36590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36592 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36599 \begin_layout Subsection
36601 \begin_inset Index idx
36604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36611 \begin_inset Index idx
36614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36615 Longtables ! Caption
36623 \begin_layout Standard
36624 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36625 Floats are described in section
36626 \begin_inset space ~
36630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36632 reference "sec:Floats"
36636 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36643 \begin_inset space ~
36651 \begin_layout Subsection
36655 \begin_layout Standard
36656 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36657 \begin_inset space ~
36661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36663 reference "sec:Index"
36670 \begin_layout Subsection
36674 \begin_layout Standard
36675 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36676 \begin_inset space ~
36680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36682 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36689 \begin_layout Subsection
36693 \begin_layout Standard
36694 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36695 Tables are described in section
36696 \begin_inset space ~
36700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36702 reference "sec:Tables"
36706 and in detail in the chapter
36713 \begin_inset space ~
36721 \begin_layout Subsection
36725 \begin_layout Standard
36731 Graphics are described in section
36732 \begin_inset space ~
36736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36738 reference "sec:Graphics"
36745 \begin_layout Subsection
36749 \begin_layout Standard
36750 Inserts a URL as described in section
36751 \begin_inset space ~
36755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36757 reference "sub:URLs"
36764 \begin_layout Subsection
36768 \begin_layout Standard
36769 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36770 \begin_inset space ~
36774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36776 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36783 \begin_layout Subsection
36787 \begin_layout Standard
36788 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36789 \begin_inset space ~
36793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36795 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36802 \begin_layout Subsection
36806 \begin_layout Standard
36807 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36808 \begin_inset space ~
36812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36814 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36821 \begin_layout Subsection
36825 \begin_layout Standard
36826 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36827 title or caption of a float.
36828 Inserts a short title as described in section
36829 \begin_inset space ~
36833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36835 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36842 \begin_layout Subsection
36846 \begin_layout Standard
36847 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36848 \begin_inset space ~
36852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36854 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36861 \begin_layout Subsection
36863 \begin_inset Index idx
36866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36875 \begin_layout Standard
36876 Inserts a program listings box.
36877 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36879 Program Code Listings
36884 \begin_inset space ~
36892 \begin_layout Subsection
36896 \begin_layout Standard
36897 Inserts the actual date.
36898 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36900 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36908 \begin_inset space ~
36916 \begin_layout Subsection
36920 \begin_layout Standard
36921 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36922 \begin_inset space ~
36926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36928 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36935 \begin_layout Section
36937 \begin_inset Index idx
36940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36949 \begin_layout Standard
36950 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36951 \begin_inset space ~
36954 of the current document.
36955 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36958 \begin_layout Subsection
36962 \begin_layout Standard
36963 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36964 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36965 to jump, for example, between section
36966 \begin_inset space ~
36970 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36971 \begin_inset space ~
36974 2.5 and use the submenu
36977 \begin_inset space ~
36981 \begin_inset space ~
36988 \begin_inset space ~
36994 \begin_inset space ~
36998 \begin_inset space ~
37004 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37008 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37014 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37017 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37020 \begin_layout Standard
37021 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37025 \begin_inset space ~
37030 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37033 \begin_inset space ~
37038 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37041 \begin_layout Subsection
37042 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37045 \begin_layout Standard
37046 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37050 \begin_layout Subsection
37054 \begin_layout Standard
37055 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37056 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37057 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37061 \begin_inset space ~
37065 \begin_inset space ~
37073 \begin_layout Subsection
37077 \begin_layout Standard
37078 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37081 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37083 \begin_inset space ~
37091 \begin_inset space ~
37096 manual for a detailed description.
37099 \begin_layout Section
37101 \begin_inset Index idx
37104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37113 \begin_layout Subsection
37117 \begin_layout Standard
37118 Change Tracking is described in section
37119 \begin_inset space ~
37123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37125 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37132 \begin_layout Subsection
37137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37147 \begin_layout Standard
37148 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
37150 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
37151 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37152 to the clipboard or update the view.
37153 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
37156 \begin_layout Subsection
37157 Start Appendix Here
37160 \begin_layout Standard
37161 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37162 as described in section
37163 \begin_inset space ~
37167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37169 reference "sec:Appendices"
37176 \begin_layout Subsection
37178 \begin_inset space ~
37184 \begin_layout Standard
37185 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37186 default output format for the document (menu
37188 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37189 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37190 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37192 \begin_inset space ~
37196 \begin_inset space ~
37202 \begin_inset space ~
37206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37208 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37212 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
37214 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37215 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37217 \begin_inset space ~
37220 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37222 \begin_inset space ~
37225 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37227 \begin_inset space ~
37231 \begin_inset space ~
37237 \begin_inset space ~
37241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37243 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37247 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37248 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37250 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37251 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37253 \begin_inset space ~
37256 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37258 \begin_inset space ~
37261 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37265 \begin_inset space ~
37269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37271 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37276 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37277 The default output format is
37280 \begin_inset space ~
37288 \begin_layout Subsection
37289 View (Other Formats)
37292 \begin_layout Standard
37293 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37294 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37295 actual document with an external program.
37296 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37297 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
37298 All possible formats are listed in section
37299 \begin_inset space ~
37303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37305 reference "sub:Export"
37310 You should at least see the menu entry
37315 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
37316 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
37317 \begin_inset space ~
37321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37323 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37328 \begin_inset Index idx
37331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37332 Reconfiguration of LyX
37340 \begin_layout Standard
37341 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37342 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37344 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37345 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37347 \begin_inset space ~
37350 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37352 \begin_inset space ~
37355 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37359 \begin_inset space ~
37363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37365 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37370 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37373 \begin_layout Subsection
37375 \begin_inset space ~
37381 \begin_layout Standard
37382 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37383 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37386 \begin_layout Subsection
37387 Update (Other Formats)
37390 \begin_layout Standard
37391 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37392 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37395 \begin_layout Subsection
37396 View Master Document
37399 \begin_layout Standard
37400 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37416 \begin_inset space ~
37421 manual for more information on this topic).
37422 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37423 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37427 \begin_inset space ~
37431 \begin_inset space ~
37436 generates the output of the whole book, while
37440 will just output the chapter alone.
37443 \begin_layout Standard
37444 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37445 in the document settings (menu
37447 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37448 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37449 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37451 \begin_inset space ~
37455 \begin_inset space ~
37461 \begin_inset space ~
37465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37467 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37471 ) or in the preferences (menu
37473 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37474 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37476 \begin_inset space ~
37479 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37481 \begin_inset space ~
37484 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37486 \begin_inset space ~
37490 \begin_inset space ~
37496 \begin_inset space ~
37500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37502 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37509 \begin_layout Subsection
37510 Update Master Document
37513 \begin_layout Standard
37514 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37530 \begin_inset space ~
37535 manual for more information on this topic).
37536 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37537 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37540 \begin_layout Standard
37541 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37542 in the document settings (menu
37544 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37545 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37546 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37548 \begin_inset space ~
37552 \begin_inset space ~
37558 \begin_inset space ~
37562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37564 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37568 ) or in the preferences (menu
37570 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37571 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37573 \begin_inset space ~
37576 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37578 \begin_inset space ~
37581 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37583 \begin_inset space ~
37587 \begin_inset space ~
37593 \begin_inset space ~
37597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37599 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37606 \begin_layout Subsection
37610 \begin_layout Standard
37611 Un/compresses the current document.
37614 \begin_layout Subsection
37618 \begin_layout Standard
37619 The document settings are described in appendix
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37626 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37633 \begin_layout Section
37635 \begin_inset Index idx
37638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37647 \begin_layout Subsection
37651 \begin_layout Standard
37652 Spell checking is explained in section
37653 \begin_inset space ~
37657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37659 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37666 \begin_layout Subsection
37670 \begin_layout Standard
37671 The thesaurus is described in section
37672 \begin_inset space ~
37676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37678 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37685 \begin_layout Subsection
37687 \begin_inset Index idx
37690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37697 \begin_inset Index idx
37700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37709 \begin_layout Standard
37710 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37711 the highlighted document part.
37714 \begin_layout Subsection
37719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37727 \begin_inset Index idx
37730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37739 \begin_layout Standard
37740 Generates with the help of the program
37744 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37745 This feature is not available on Windows.
37748 \begin_layout Subsection
37753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37761 \begin_inset Index idx
37764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37773 \begin_layout Standard
37774 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37779 \begin_inset space ~
37784 to see the full filename paths.
37787 \begin_layout Subsection
37789 \begin_inset Index idx
37792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37801 \begin_layout Standard
37802 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37803 \begin_inset space ~
37807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37809 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37816 \begin_layout Subsection
37818 \begin_inset Index idx
37821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37822 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37833 Reconfiguration of LyX
37837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37850 \begin_inset Index idx
37853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37854 Reconfiguration of LyX
37862 \begin_layout Standard
37863 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37864 needs; see also section
37865 \begin_inset space ~
37869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37871 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37878 \begin_layout Subsection
37882 \begin_layout Standard
37887 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37888 \begin_inset space ~
37892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37894 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37901 \begin_layout Section
37903 \begin_inset Index idx
37906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37915 \begin_layout Standard
37916 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37918 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37922 \begin_layout Standard
37926 \begin_inset space ~
37931 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37932 found by LyX (see also section
37933 \begin_inset space ~
37937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37939 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37946 \begin_layout Standard
37950 \begin_inset space ~
37957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37966 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
37970 \begin_layout Section
37972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37974 name "sec:Toolbars"
37981 \begin_layout Standard
37982 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37983 \begin_inset space ~
37987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37989 reference "sub:Toolbars"
37996 \begin_layout Standard
37997 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37998 This is described in the
38000 Additional Features
38005 \begin_layout Subsection
38007 \begin_inset Index idx
38010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38019 \begin_layout Standard
38020 \begin_inset Graphics
38021 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38029 \begin_layout Standard
38030 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38036 \begin_layout Standard
38037 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38054 \begin_inset Note Note
38057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38058 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38063 manual for more information.
38071 \begin_layout Standard
38072 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38078 \begin_layout Standard
38079 \begin_inset Tabular
38080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38081 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38089 \begin_inset Graphics
38090 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38104 pull-down box for the environments
38117 \begin_layout Standard
38118 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38124 \begin_layout Standard
38126 \begin_inset Tabular
38127 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38128 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38129 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38130 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38131 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38154 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38161 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38184 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38214 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38230 arg "dialog-show print"
38238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38244 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38260 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38274 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38304 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38311 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38334 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38341 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38364 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38371 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38394 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38401 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38424 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38431 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38440 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38454 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38460 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38464 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38480 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38494 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38513 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38522 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38536 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38537 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38544 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38565 Emphasize text, function of the
38567 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38569 \begin_inset space ~
38572 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38581 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38602 Set text to noun style, function of the
38604 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38606 \begin_inset space ~
38609 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38618 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38627 arg "textstyle-apply"
38635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38639 Format text using the current settings in the
38641 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38643 \begin_inset space ~
38646 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38655 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38678 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38679 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38681 \begin_inset space ~
38690 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38699 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38713 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38720 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38727 arg "tabular-insert"
38735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38741 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38748 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38757 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38769 Toggle outline window on/off,
38771 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38778 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38787 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38799 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38805 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38814 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38826 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38839 \begin_layout Subsection
38841 \begin_inset Index idx
38844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38853 \begin_layout Standard
38854 \begin_inset Graphics
38855 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38863 \begin_layout Standard
38864 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38870 \begin_layout Standard
38871 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38875 \begin_layout Standard
38876 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38882 \begin_layout Standard
38883 \begin_inset Tabular
38884 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38885 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38886 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38887 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38888 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38915 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38924 arg "layout Enumerate"
38932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38942 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38951 arg "layout Itemize"
38959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38969 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38996 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39005 arg "layout Description"
39013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39023 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39032 arg "depth-increment"
39040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39046 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39048 \begin_inset space ~
39052 \begin_inset space ~
39061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39070 arg "depth-decrement"
39078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39084 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39086 \begin_inset space ~
39090 \begin_inset space ~
39099 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39108 arg "float-insert figure"
39116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39122 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39123 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39130 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39139 arg "float-insert table"
39147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39153 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39154 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39161 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39184 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39200 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39214 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39230 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39244 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39274 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39276 \begin_inset space ~
39285 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39294 arg "nomencl-insert"
39302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39308 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39310 \begin_inset space ~
39319 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39328 arg "footnote-insert"
39336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39342 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39349 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39358 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39372 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39374 \begin_inset space ~
39383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39406 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39407 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39420 \begin_inset space ~
39429 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39438 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39452 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39459 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39482 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39489 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39512 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39529 \begin_inset space ~
39538 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39547 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39561 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39562 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39569 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39578 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39592 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39593 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39595 \begin_inset space ~
39604 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39613 arg "dialog-show character"
39621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39627 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39629 \begin_inset space ~
39632 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39648 arg "layout-paragraph"
39656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39662 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39664 \begin_inset space ~
39673 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39682 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39696 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39710 \begin_layout Subsection
39711 View/Update Toolbar
39712 \begin_inset Index idx
39715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39716 Toolbar ! View / Update
39724 \begin_layout Standard
39725 \begin_inset Graphics
39726 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39733 \begin_layout Standard
39734 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39740 \begin_layout Standard
39741 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39745 \begin_layout Standard
39746 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39752 \begin_layout Standard
39753 \begin_inset Tabular
39754 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39755 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39756 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39757 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39758 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39781 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39788 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39797 arg "buffer-update"
39805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39811 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39818 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39827 arg "master-buffer-view"
39835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39841 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39843 \begin_inset space ~
39852 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39861 arg "master-buffer-update"
39869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39875 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39877 \begin_inset space ~
39881 \begin_inset space ~
39890 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39899 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39913 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39914 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39915 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39916 Synchronize with Output
39922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39927 \begin_inset Graphics
39928 filename ../images/view-others.png
39930 groupId toolbarbuttons
39941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39947 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39948 View (Other Formats)
39954 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39959 \begin_inset Graphics
39960 filename ../images/update-others.png
39962 groupId toolbarbuttons
39971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39977 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39978 Update (Other Formats)
39991 \begin_layout Standard
39992 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39996 \begin_layout Subsection
40000 \begin_layout Standard
40001 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40002 \begin_inset space ~
40006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40008 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40012 , the table toolbar
40013 \begin_inset Index idx
40016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40025 \begin_inset space ~
40030 manual and the math macro toolbar
40031 \begin_inset Index idx
40034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40047 \begin_layout Chapter
40048 The Document Settings
40049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40051 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40056 \begin_inset Index idx
40059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40060 Document ! Settings
40068 \begin_layout Standard
40072 \begin_inset space ~
40077 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40078 is called with the menu
40080 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40084 You can save your document settings as default with the
40086 Save as Document Defaults
40088 button in any dialog.
40089 This will create a template named
40093 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
40097 \begin_layout Standard
40102 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40103 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40106 \begin_layout Standard
40107 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40108 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40109 to find the one you are looking for.
40110 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40111 the submenus of the dialog.
40113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40117 \begin_inset space \space{}
40121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40128 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40129 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40130 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40133 \begin_layout Section
40137 \begin_layout Standard
40138 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40140 Document classes are described in section
40141 \begin_inset space ~
40145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40147 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40155 \begin_layout Standard
40159 \begin_inset space ~
40164 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
40168 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
40169 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40171 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40180 \begin_layout Standard
40181 Some classes use special class options by default.
40182 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40186 and you can decide to use them or not.
40187 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40188 recommended you leave them untouched.
40193 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40198 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
40199 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40205 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40206 \begin_inset Newline newline
40211 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40214 \begin_inset Newline newline
40217 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
40223 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40225 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40237 \begin_layout Standard
40242 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40243 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
40244 document is opened without its master.
40245 This way child documents are always compilable.
40246 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40253 \begin_inset space ~
40261 \begin_layout Standard
40262 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
40272 \begin_inset Index idx
40275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40276 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
40282 \begin_inset Index idx
40285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40286 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
40291 for cross-references, see section
40292 \begin_inset space ~
40296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40298 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40305 \begin_layout Section
40309 \begin_layout Standard
40310 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40311 Please refer to the section
40314 \begin_inset space ~
40322 \begin_inset space ~
40327 manual for details.
40330 \begin_layout Section
40334 \begin_layout Standard
40335 Modules are explained in section
40336 \begin_inset space ~
40340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40342 reference "sub:Modules"
40349 \begin_layout Section
40353 \begin_layout Standard
40355 \begin_inset space ~
40359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40361 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40368 \begin_layout Section
40372 \begin_layout Standard
40373 The document font settings are described in section
40374 \begin_inset space ~
40378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40380 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40387 \begin_layout Section
40391 \begin_layout Standard
40392 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40404 \begin_inset space ~
40409 and whether it should be a
40412 \begin_inset space ~
40417 can also be specified here.
40420 \begin_layout Standard
40421 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40423 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40425 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40428 \begin_layout Section
40432 \begin_layout Standard
40433 This dialog is described in sections
40434 \begin_inset space ~
40438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40440 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40447 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40454 \begin_layout Section
40458 \begin_layout Standard
40459 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40460 \begin_inset space ~
40464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40466 reference "sub:Margins"
40473 \begin_layout Section
40475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40477 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40482 \begin_inset Index idx
40485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40486 Language ! Encoding
40494 \begin_layout Standard
40495 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40496 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40497 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40498 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40499 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40500 known for a particular character).
40504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40505 The known commands are defined in a text file (
40510 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
40515 manual for details.
40523 \begin_layout Standard
40524 If you use the option
40528 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40529 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40530 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40531 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40532 exactly one encoding.
40533 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40536 \begin_layout Standard
40537 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40538 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40539 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40540 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40541 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40542 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40547 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40548 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40549 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40550 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40551 engines to standard LaTeX.
40552 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40553 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40556 \begin_inset space ~
40563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40575 \begin_inset space ~
40582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40594 \begin_inset space ~
40600 \begin_inset space ~
40604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40606 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40611 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40615 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40618 \begin_layout Standard
40622 \begin_inset space ~
40627 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40637 The possible settings are:
40640 \begin_layout Description
40641 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40643 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40644 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40648 \begin_inset space ~
40652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40654 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40661 \begin_layout Description
40662 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40663 format you will use.
40664 In many cases this will be
40669 \begin_inset Index idx
40672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40673 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40679 If the newer package
40684 \begin_inset Index idx
40687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40688 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40693 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40694 this package will be used instead of
40701 \begin_layout Description
40703 \begin_inset space ~
40714 would be more appropriate.
40717 \begin_layout Description
40718 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40719 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40723 (for German texts), type in
40726 \begin_inset Newline newline
40731 usepackage{ngerman}
40734 \begin_layout Description
40735 None will not use a language package.
40736 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40739 \begin_layout Standard
40740 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40743 \begin_layout Description
40745 \begin_inset space ~
40749 \begin_inset space ~
40753 \begin_inset space ~
40760 , but the LaTeX-package
40765 \begin_inset Index idx
40768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40769 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40775 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40776 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40777 languages in TeX code.
40780 \begin_layout Description
40781 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40782 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40783 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40786 \begin_layout Description
40788 \begin_inset space ~
40792 \begin_inset space ~
40795 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40798 \begin_layout Description
40800 \begin_inset space ~
40804 \begin_inset space ~
40807 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40810 \begin_layout Description
40812 \begin_inset space ~
40815 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40818 \begin_layout Description
40820 \begin_inset space ~
40824 \begin_inset space ~
40827 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40828 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40831 \begin_layout Description
40833 \begin_inset space ~
40837 \begin_inset space ~
40840 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40844 \begin_layout Description
40846 \begin_inset space ~
40850 \begin_inset space ~
40853 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40854 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40857 \begin_layout Description
40859 \begin_inset space ~
40863 \begin_inset space ~
40867 \begin_inset space ~
40870 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40871 \begin_inset space ~
40877 \begin_layout Description
40879 \begin_inset space ~
40883 \begin_inset space ~
40887 \begin_inset space ~
40890 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40891 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40894 \begin_layout Description
40896 \begin_inset space ~
40900 \begin_inset space ~
40903 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40904 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40905 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40906 \begin_inset space ~
40910 \begin_inset space ~
40916 \begin_layout Description
40918 \begin_inset space ~
40922 \begin_inset space ~
40925 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40926 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40927 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40928 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40929 \begin_inset space ~
40933 \begin_inset space ~
40939 \begin_layout Description
40941 \begin_inset space ~
40945 \begin_inset space ~
40948 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40951 \begin_layout Description
40953 \begin_inset space ~
40957 \begin_inset space ~
40960 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40963 \begin_layout Description
40965 \begin_inset space ~
40969 \begin_inset space ~
40972 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40975 \begin_layout Description
40977 \begin_inset space ~
40980 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40983 \begin_layout Description
40985 \begin_inset space ~
40988 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40991 \begin_layout Description
40993 \begin_inset space ~
40997 \begin_inset space ~
41000 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41003 \begin_layout Description
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41009 \begin_inset space ~
41015 \begin_layout Description
41017 \begin_inset space ~
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41024 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41027 \begin_layout Description
41029 \begin_inset space ~
41033 \begin_inset space ~
41039 \begin_layout Description
41041 \begin_inset space ~
41045 \begin_inset space ~
41048 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41053 \begin_inset Index idx
41056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41057 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41062 , when using this, set the document language to
41067 \begin_layout Description
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41073 \begin_inset space ~
41076 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41080 , when using this, set the document language to
41083 \begin_inset space ~
41089 \begin_layout Description
41091 \begin_inset space ~
41095 \begin_inset space ~
41098 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41103 \begin_inset Index idx
41106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41107 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
41112 , when using this, set the document language to
41117 \begin_layout Description
41119 \begin_inset space ~
41123 \begin_inset space ~
41126 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41130 , when using this, set the document language to
41135 \begin_layout Description
41137 \begin_inset space ~
41141 \begin_inset space ~
41144 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41148 , when using this, set the document language to
41153 \begin_layout Description
41155 \begin_inset space ~
41158 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41161 \begin_layout Description
41163 \begin_inset space ~
41167 \begin_inset space ~
41171 \begin_inset space ~
41174 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41177 \begin_layout Description
41179 \begin_inset space ~
41183 \begin_inset space ~
41187 \begin_inset space ~
41190 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41191 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41192 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41195 \begin_layout Description
41197 \begin_inset space ~
41201 \begin_inset space ~
41207 \begin_layout Description
41209 \begin_inset space ~
41213 \begin_inset space ~
41216 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41217 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41220 \begin_layout Description
41222 \begin_inset space ~
41226 \begin_inset space ~
41229 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
41234 \begin_inset Index idx
41237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41238 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41243 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41246 \begin_layout Description
41248 \begin_inset space ~
41252 \begin_inset space ~
41255 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41263 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
41268 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
41270 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41273 \begin_layout Description
41275 \begin_inset space ~
41279 \begin_inset space ~
41282 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41287 \begin_inset Index idx
41290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41291 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
41296 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41299 \begin_layout Description
41301 \begin_inset space ~
41304 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41309 \begin_inset Index idx
41312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41313 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
41319 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41323 \begin_layout Description
41325 \begin_inset space ~
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41333 \begin_inset space ~
41336 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41343 \begin_layout Description
41345 \begin_inset space ~
41349 \begin_inset space ~
41353 \begin_inset space ~
41356 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41357 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41358 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41362 \begin_layout Description
41364 \begin_inset space ~
41368 \begin_inset space ~
41372 \begin_inset space ~
41375 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41376 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41379 \begin_layout Section
41381 \begin_inset Index idx
41384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41391 \begin_inset Index idx
41394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41401 \begin_inset Index idx
41404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41405 Color ! Shaded boxes
41411 \begin_inset Index idx
41414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41415 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41423 \begin_layout Standard
41424 Here you can alter the font color for the
41428 (default: black), for
41431 \begin_inset space ~
41436 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41440 (default: white) and for
41443 \begin_inset space ~
41453 sets the color back to the default.
41456 \begin_layout Standard
41457 Clicking any button showing
41465 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41466 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41467 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41468 later more quickly.
41471 \begin_layout Standard
41472 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41476 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
41478 \begin_inset space ~
41481 out note appears blue in the output.)
41489 \begin_layout Standard
41490 Note, if you change the
41493 \begin_inset space ~
41498 font color and use the option
41501 \begin_inset space ~
41506 in the document settings under
41509 \begin_inset space ~
41514 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41515 \begin_inset space ~
41519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41521 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41528 \begin_layout Standard
41529 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41535 \begin_layout Standard
41539 \begin_inset space ~
41548 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41550 \begin_inset space ~
41553 Code after a forced page break:
41556 \begin_layout Itemize
41557 For the page color:
41558 \begin_inset Newline newline
41565 pagecolor{color name}
41568 \begin_layout Itemize
41569 For the text color:
41570 \begin_inset Newline newline
41580 \begin_layout Standard
41581 You are restricted to one of
41617 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41624 \begin_inset space ~
41630 \begin_inset Newline newline
41633 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41634 names to refer to them:
41637 \begin_layout Itemize
41643 \begin_inset Newline newline
41648 page_backgroundcolor
41651 \begin_layout Itemize
41655 \begin_inset space ~
41661 \begin_inset Newline newline
41669 \begin_layout Itemize
41673 \begin_inset space ~
41679 \begin_inset Newline newline
41687 \begin_layout Itemize
41691 \begin_inset space ~
41697 \begin_inset Newline newline
41705 \begin_layout Standard
41706 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41707 \begin_inset space ~
41710 Cells of the Embedded
41711 \begin_inset space ~
41717 \begin_layout Section
41721 \begin_layout Standard
41722 Here you can adjust the
41726 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41730 as described in section
41731 \begin_inset space ~
41735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41737 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41744 \begin_layout Section
41748 \begin_layout Standard
41749 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41754 \begin_inset Index idx
41757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41758 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41768 \begin_inset Index idx
41771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41772 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41780 Sectioned bibliography
41782 using the LaTeX package
41787 \begin_inset Index idx
41790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41791 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41796 and you can select a
41800 for the generation of the bibliography.
41801 For a further description see section
41802 \begin_inset space ~
41806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41808 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41815 \begin_layout Section
41819 \begin_layout Standard
41820 Here you can define the
41824 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41826 \begin_inset space ~
41830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41832 reference "sec:Index"
41839 \begin_layout Section
41843 \begin_layout Standard
41844 The PDF properties are explained in section
41845 \begin_inset space ~
41849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41851 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41858 \begin_layout Section
41862 \begin_layout Standard
41863 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41868 \begin_inset Index idx
41871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41872 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41882 \begin_inset Index idx
41885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41886 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41896 \begin_inset Index idx
41899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41900 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41910 \begin_inset Index idx
41913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41914 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41919 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41922 \begin_layout Description
41923 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41924 ensure that you have enabled
41927 \begin_inset space ~
41935 \begin_layout Description
41936 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41939 \begin_inset space ~
41951 \begin_layout Description
41952 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41963 \begin_layout Description
41964 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41966 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41975 \begin_layout Section
41979 \begin_layout Standard
41980 The float placement options are described in the section
41983 \begin_inset space ~
41991 \begin_inset space ~
41999 \begin_layout Section
42003 \begin_layout Standard
42004 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42006 Program Code Listings
42011 \begin_inset space ~
42019 \begin_layout Section
42023 \begin_layout Standard
42024 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42032 set to be used and set the
42037 The itemize environment is described in section
42038 \begin_inset space ~
42042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42044 reference "sec:Itemize"
42051 \begin_layout Standard
42052 You can furthermore specify a
42055 \begin_inset space ~
42060 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
42061 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42068 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42074 \begin_inset space \space{}
42078 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42088 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42089 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42092 \begin_layout Standard
42093 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42101 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
42104 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42105 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42107 \begin_inset space ~
42113 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42117 usepackage{textcomp}
42120 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42124 usepackage{amssymb}
42134 \begin_layout Section
42138 \begin_layout Standard
42139 Branches are described in section
42140 \begin_inset space ~
42144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42146 reference "sec:Branches"
42153 \begin_layout Section
42155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42157 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42164 \begin_layout Standard
42165 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42168 \begin_layout Description
42170 \begin_inset space ~
42174 \begin_inset space ~
42177 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42197 View Master Document
42198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42205 Update Master Document
42206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42213 menu or the toolbar.
42214 The default is set in
42216 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42217 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42219 \begin_inset space ~
42222 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42226 \begin_inset space ~
42230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42232 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42239 \begin_layout Description
42241 \begin_inset space ~
42245 \begin_inset space ~
42248 Output settings for the menu
42250 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42252 \begin_inset space ~
42258 For a detailed description see section
42260 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42265 \begin_inset space ~
42273 \begin_layout Description
42275 \begin_inset space ~
42279 \begin_inset space ~
42282 Options offers settings for the export format
42288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42301 \begin_inset space ~
42306 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42307 \begin_inset space ~
42310 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42314 \begin_inset space ~
42319 settings are described in detail in section
42321 Math Output in XHTML
42326 \begin_inset space ~
42335 \begin_inset space ~
42339 \begin_inset space ~
42344 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42347 \begin_layout Section
42352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42362 \begin_layout Standard
42363 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42364 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42365 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42366 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42370 \begin_layout Standard
42371 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42372 \begin_inset space ~
42376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42378 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42385 \begin_layout Chapter
42391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42393 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42398 \begin_inset Index idx
42401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42410 \begin_layout Standard
42411 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42413 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42417 It has the following submenus.
42420 \begin_layout Section
42424 \begin_layout Subsection
42428 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42429 User Interface File
42430 \begin_inset Index idx
42433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42434 Customization ! of toolbars
42440 \begin_inset Index idx
42443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42444 Customization ! of menus
42452 \begin_layout Standard
42453 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42454 interface (ui) file.
42455 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42463 \begin_layout Description
42468 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42471 \begin_layout Description
42478 the menu entries in popup context menus
42481 \begin_layout Description
42486 specifies the toolbar buttons
42489 \begin_layout Standard
42490 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42491 and edit the entries.
42494 \begin_layout Standard
42495 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42507 entries must be finished with an explicit
42532 and in the case of the
42533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42545 The syntax for the entries is:
42548 \begin_layout Standard
42549 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42577 \begin_layout Standard
42579 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42582 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42584 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42597 \begin_inset space ~
42605 \begin_layout Standard
42606 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42612 \begin_layout Standard
42613 For example, assuming you use the menu
42615 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42618 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42622 \begin_layout Standard
42623 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42647 \begin_layout Standard
42649 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42664 to have the sixth bookmark.
42667 \begin_layout Standard
42671 \begin_inset space ~
42676 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42677 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42678 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42681 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42692 \begin_layout Standard
42695 Enable tool tips in main work area
42697 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42701 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42705 \begin_layout Standard
42708 Restore window layouts and geometries
42710 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42711 in the last LyX session.
42714 \begin_layout Standard
42717 Restore cursor positions
42719 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42723 \begin_layout Standard
42726 Load opened files from last session
42728 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42731 \begin_layout Standard
42734 Clear all session information
42736 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42737 of last opened documents, etc.).
42740 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42742 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42744 name "sub:Backup documents"
42749 \begin_inset Index idx
42752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42761 \begin_layout Standard
42764 Backup original documents when saving
42766 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42767 it was saved the last time.
42768 It is stored in the
42771 \begin_inset space ~
42777 \begin_inset space ~
42781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42783 reference "sec:Paths"
42787 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42790 \begin_inset space ~
42796 The backup file has the file extension
42797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42811 \begin_layout Standard
42814 Backup documents, every
42816 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42819 \begin_layout Standard
42822 Save documents compressed by default
42824 always saves files in a compressed format.
42827 \begin_layout Standard
42832 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42835 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42837 \begin_inset space ~
42845 \begin_layout Standard
42848 Open documents in tabs
42850 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42853 \begin_layout Standard
42858 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42864 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42870 reference "sec:Paths"
42874 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42880 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42882 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42885 \begin_layout Standard
42888 Single close-tab button
42890 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42893 \begin_inset Graphics
42894 filename ../images/closetab.png
42901 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42902 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42905 \begin_layout Standard
42906 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42914 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42922 \begin_layout Subsection
42924 \begin_inset Index idx
42927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42936 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42943 \begin_layout Standard
42944 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42947 \begin_layout Standard
42948 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42956 This section only deals with the fonts
42961 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42964 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42965 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42976 \begin_layout Standard
42977 By default, LyX uses
42993 (depends on the system) as its
42996 \begin_inset space ~
43012 \begin_layout Standard
43013 You can change the font size with the
43020 \begin_layout Standard
43025 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43030 points have the size of 1
43031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43035 \begin_inset space ~
43039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43041 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43046 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43051 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43052 \begin_inset space ~
43056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43058 reference "sub:Document-Font"
43065 \begin_layout Standard
43068 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43070 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
43071 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43072 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43073 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43075 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43076 \begin_inset space ~
43082 \begin_layout Subsection
43084 \begin_inset Index idx
43087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43094 \begin_inset Index idx
43097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43106 \begin_layout Standard
43107 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
43108 the list and selecting the
43115 \begin_layout Standard
43116 By checking the option
43120 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43123 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43124 \begin_inset space ~
43128 \begin_inset space ~
43133 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43136 \begin_layout Subsection
43138 \begin_inset Index idx
43141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43150 \begin_layout Standard
43151 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
43154 \begin_layout Standard
43159 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43160 This feature is described in section
43161 \begin_inset space ~
43165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43167 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43174 \begin_layout Standard
43175 Checking the option
43178 \begin_inset space ~
43182 \begin_inset space ~
43186 \begin_inset space ~
43191 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43194 \begin_layout Section
43196 \begin_inset Index idx
43199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43208 \begin_layout Subsection
43212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43216 \begin_layout Standard
43219 Cursor follows scrollbar
43221 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43225 \begin_layout Standard
43226 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43227 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43228 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43231 \begin_layout Standard
43234 Scroll below end of document
43236 is self-explanatory.
43239 \begin_layout Standard
43240 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
43247 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43249 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43250 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43253 \begin_layout Standard
43256 Sort environments alphabetically
43258 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43261 \begin_layout Standard
43264 Group environments by their category
43266 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43269 \begin_layout Standard
43274 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43285 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43289 \begin_layout Standard
43290 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43295 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43296 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43300 \begin_layout Subsection
43302 \begin_inset Index idx
43305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43312 \begin_inset Index idx
43315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43316 Settings ! Shortcuts
43324 \begin_layout Standard
43329 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43330 Several binding files are available, among them:
43333 \begin_layout Description
43334 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43337 \begin_layout Description
43338 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43350 \begin_layout Description
43351 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43354 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43362 \begin_layout Standard
43363 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43368 , and binding files for special languages.
43369 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43374 \begin_inset space \space{}
43378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43386 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43390 \begin_layout Standard
43391 Some binding files, like
43395 , only have a limited scope.
43396 When looking at the end of the file
43400 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43403 \begin_layout Standard
43407 \begin_inset space ~
43411 \begin_inset space ~
43416 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43417 in the selected key binding file.
43420 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43424 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43429 \begin_inset Index idx
43432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43433 Key Bindings ! Editing
43441 \begin_layout Standard
43442 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43443 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43444 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43447 Show key-bindings containing
43450 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43451 Insert there for example as keyword
43452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43459 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43460 functions that contain
43461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43469 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43470 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43474 that you will find in the
43481 \begin_layout Standard
43482 For example, to add the shortcut
43490 , select the function and press the
43495 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43496 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43499 \begin_layout Standard
43500 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43501 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43502 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43503 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43504 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43509 \begin_layout Standard
43510 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43513 \begin_layout Standard
43514 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43516 The syntax of the entries is:
43519 \begin_layout Standard
43525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43543 \begin_layout Subsection
43545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43547 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43552 \begin_inset Index idx
43555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43562 \begin_inset Index idx
43565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43566 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43574 \begin_layout Standard
43575 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43576 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43577 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43578 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43581 \begin_inset space ~
43585 \begin_inset space ~
43590 and select the keyboard map file named
43597 \begin_layout Standard
43606 keyboard map and, if you use the
43610 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43613 arg "keymap-primary"
43619 arg "keymap-secondary"
43622 respectively or toggle between them with
43625 arg "keymap-toggle"
43631 \begin_layout Standard
43632 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43640 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43649 \begin_layout Standard
43650 You can also specify the mouse
43652 Wheel scrolling speed
43655 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43659 \begin_layout Standard
43667 \begin_inset space ~
43671 \begin_inset space ~
43676 you can select a key for zooming.
43677 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43680 \begin_layout Subsection
43684 \begin_layout Standard
43685 Input completion is described in section
43686 \begin_inset space ~
43690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43692 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43699 \begin_layout Section
43701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43708 \begin_inset Index idx
43711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43718 \begin_inset Index idx
43721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43730 \begin_layout Standard
43731 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43733 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43736 \begin_layout Description
43738 \begin_inset space ~
43741 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43742 It is the default when you
43753 \begin_inset space ~
43761 \begin_layout Description
43763 \begin_inset space ~
43766 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43768 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43770 \begin_inset space ~
43774 \begin_inset space ~
43782 \begin_layout Description
43784 \begin_inset space ~
43787 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43793 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43797 \begin_inset Newline newline
43801 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43813 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43821 \begin_layout Description
43823 \begin_inset space ~
43827 \begin_inset Index idx
43830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43836 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43837 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43838 \begin_inset space ~
43842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43844 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43852 will be used to save the backups.
43853 \begin_inset Newline newline
43856 Backup files have the ending
43857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43867 \begin_layout Description
43872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43880 \begin_inset space ~
43883 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43884 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43885 \begin_inset Newline newline
43892 You add a BibTeX-database
43897 You can edit this file with the program
43906 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43909 \begin_inset space ~
43915 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43920 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43921 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43927 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43928 \begin_inset Newline newline
43931 The pipe is also used for the
43936 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43942 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43947 \begin_inset Newline newline
43950 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43951 \begin_inset Newline newline
43967 \begin_layout Description
43969 \begin_inset space ~
43972 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43975 \begin_layout Description
43977 \begin_inset space ~
43980 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43981 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43982 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43985 \begin_layout Description
43987 \begin_inset space ~
43990 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43996 You only need to specify it if you are using
44000 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44006 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44010 \begin_layout Description
44012 \begin_inset space ~
44015 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44016 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
44017 where to find it on the system.
44018 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
44019 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44028 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44029 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44032 \begin_layout Description
44034 \begin_inset space ~
44037 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44038 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
44040 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44042 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44043 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44044 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44045 scanned for the input files.
44046 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44047 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
44048 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44049 compilation may fail for some documents.
44052 \begin_layout Section
44056 \begin_layout Standard
44057 Here you can insert your
44066 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44068 \begin_inset space ~
44072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44074 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44078 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44081 \begin_layout Section
44083 \begin_inset Index idx
44086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44087 Language ! Settings
44093 \begin_inset Index idx
44096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44097 Settings ! Language
44105 \begin_layout Subsection
44107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44109 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
44116 \begin_layout Description
44118 \begin_inset space ~
44122 \begin_inset space ~
44125 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
44126 You can find its actual translation status here:
44127 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44129 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44136 \begin_layout Description
44138 \begin_inset space ~
44141 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
44143 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44144 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44161 The most widespread language package is
44166 \begin_inset Index idx
44169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44170 LaTeX-packages ! babel
44175 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
44176 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
44177 alternative language package
44182 \begin_inset Index idx
44185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44186 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
44191 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44192 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44198 The available selections are described in section
44199 \begin_inset space ~
44203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44205 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44212 \begin_layout Description
44214 \begin_inset space ~
44217 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
44218 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
44219 An example is the start command
44225 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44230 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44245 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44250 \begin_layout Description
44252 \begin_inset space ~
44260 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44261 command toggles the package on and off.
44264 \begin_layout Description
44266 \begin_inset space ~
44270 \begin_inset space ~
44273 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44277 \begin_layout Description
44279 \begin_inset space ~
44283 \begin_inset space ~
44286 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44287 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44288 used by all LaTeX-packages.
44289 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44296 \begin_layout Description
44298 \begin_inset space ~
44301 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44303 When this option is not set, the
44306 \begin_inset space ~
44311 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
44312 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44315 \begin_inset space ~
44323 \begin_layout Description
44325 \begin_inset space ~
44331 \begin_inset space ~
44337 When it is not set, the
44340 \begin_inset space ~
44345 is set to the end of the document.
44348 \begin_layout Description
44350 \begin_inset space ~
44354 \begin_inset space ~
44357 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44358 language will be underlined in blue.
44361 \begin_layout Description
44363 \begin_inset space ~
44367 \begin_inset space ~
44370 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44371 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44374 \begin_layout Description
44376 \begin_inset space ~
44379 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44380 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44381 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44382 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44385 \begin_layout Subsection
44389 \begin_layout Standard
44390 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44391 \begin_inset space ~
44395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44397 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44404 \begin_layout Section
44408 \begin_layout Subsection
44412 \begin_layout Description
44414 \begin_inset space ~
44418 \begin_inset space ~
44421 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44424 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44425 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44427 \begin_inset space ~
44433 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44436 \begin_layout Description
44438 \begin_inset space ~
44442 \begin_inset Index idx
44445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44452 \begin_inset Index idx
44455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44456 Settings ! Date format
44461 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44462 \begin_inset Newline newline
44466 \begin_inset Flex URL
44469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44471 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44477 \begin_inset Newline newline
44480 For example the format
44481 \begin_inset Newline newline
44485 \begin_inset Newline newline
44488 prints the date as day/month/year.
44491 \begin_layout Description
44493 \begin_inset space ~
44497 \begin_inset space ~
44500 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44503 \begin_layout Description
44505 \begin_inset space ~
44508 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44510 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44512 \begin_inset space ~
44518 For a detailed description see section
44520 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44525 \begin_inset space ~
44533 \begin_layout Subsection
44535 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44542 \begin_inset Index idx
44545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44552 \begin_inset Index idx
44555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44564 \begin_layout Description
44566 \begin_inset space ~
44569 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44574 The name will be used when the
44579 \begin_inset Newline newline
44583 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44591 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44599 \begin_layout Description
44601 \begin_inset space ~
44604 command is the command LyX
44605 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44612 LaTeX uses for printing.
44620 \begin_layout Description
44622 \begin_inset space ~
44626 \begin_inset space ~
44629 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44630 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44631 of the program that provides the
44638 \begin_layout Description
44640 \begin_inset space ~
44644 \begin_inset space ~
44648 \begin_inset space ~
44651 printer This option works only for the
44656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44668 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44669 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44672 \begin_layout Subsection
44677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44687 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44692 \begin_inset Index idx
44695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44704 \begin_layout Description
44706 \begin_inset space ~
44713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44721 \begin_inset space ~
44725 \begin_inset space ~
44728 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44733 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44754 are used for Cyrillic.
44755 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44768 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44769 LyX sets up in the background.
44770 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44773 \begin_layout Description
44775 \begin_inset space ~
44779 \begin_inset space ~
44782 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44787 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44790 \begin_layout Description
44792 \begin_inset space ~
44796 \begin_inset space ~
44800 \begin_inset space ~
44804 \begin_inset space ~
44807 options They only have an effect when the program
44811 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44814 \begin_layout Standard
44815 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44816 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44817 manuals of the applications.
44820 \begin_layout Description
44822 \begin_inset space ~
44825 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44826 \begin_inset space ~
44830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44832 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44839 \begin_layout Description
44841 \begin_inset space ~
44844 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44845 \begin_inset space ~
44849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44851 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44858 \begin_layout Description
44860 \begin_inset space ~
44863 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44864 \begin_inset space ~
44868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44870 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44877 \begin_layout Description
44882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44890 \begin_inset space ~
44893 command Command for the program
44897 that is described in the section
44903 Additional Features
44908 \begin_layout Standard
44909 There are additionally the following options:
44912 \begin_layout Description
44914 \begin_inset space ~
44918 \begin_inset space ~
44922 \begin_inset space ~
44926 \begin_inset space ~
44930 \begin_inset space ~
44933 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44951 to separate folders.
44952 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44953 \begin_inset Index idx
44956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44963 \begin_inset Index idx
44966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44975 \begin_layout Description
44977 \begin_inset space ~
44981 \begin_inset space ~
44985 \begin_inset space ~
44989 \begin_inset space ~
44993 \begin_inset space ~
44997 \begin_inset space ~
45000 changes Removes all manually set
45006 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45007 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45009 \begin_inset space ~
45014 dialog when changing the document class.
45017 \begin_layout Section
45019 \begin_inset space ~
45023 \begin_inset Index idx
45026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45035 \begin_layout Subsection
45037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45039 name "sub:Converters"
45044 \begin_inset Index idx
45047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45056 \begin_layout Standard
45057 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45058 from one format to another.
45059 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45060 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45067 \begin_inset space ~
45072 field and press the
45077 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45081 \begin_inset space ~
45086 drop-down list, modify the
45090 field and press the
45097 \begin_layout Standard
45100 Converter File Cache
45106 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45108 Maximum Age (in days
45111 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45112 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45115 \begin_layout Standard
45116 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45117 definition, is described in the section
45128 \begin_layout Subsection
45130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45132 name "sec:File-Formats"
45137 \begin_inset Index idx
45140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45147 \begin_inset Index idx
45150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45159 \begin_layout Standard
45160 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
45169 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45172 \begin_layout Standard
45173 You can also define the
45175 Default output format
45177 that is used when you use
45179 View, Update, View Master Document
45183 Update Master Document
45189 menu or the toolbar.
45192 \begin_layout Standard
45193 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45204 \begin_layout Standard
45205 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
45206 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45207 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45208 This is done by specifying a
45213 More about this is described in the section
45224 \begin_layout Chapter
45225 Units available in LyX
45226 \begin_inset Index idx
45229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45238 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45245 \begin_layout Standard
45247 \begin_inset space ~
45251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45253 reference "tab:Units"
45257 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
45260 \begin_layout Standard
45261 \begin_inset Float table
45267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45268 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45286 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45294 \begin_inset Tabular
45295 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45296 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
45297 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45298 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45426 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45449 scaled point (65536
45450 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45478 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45510 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45565 % of original image width
45572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45779 \begin_layout Chapter
45781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45783 name "chap:Credits"
45790 \begin_layout Standard
45791 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45792 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45795 \begin_layout Itemize
45798 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45801 \begin_layout Itemize
45807 \begin_layout Itemize
45813 \begin_layout Itemize
45819 \begin_layout Itemize
45825 \begin_layout Itemize
45831 \begin_layout Itemize
45837 \begin_layout Itemize
45843 \begin_layout Itemize
45846 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45849 \begin_layout Itemize
45855 \begin_layout Itemize
45861 \begin_layout Itemize
45867 \begin_layout Itemize
45873 \begin_layout Itemize
45879 \begin_layout Itemize
45885 \begin_layout Itemize
45891 \begin_layout Itemize
45897 \begin_layout Itemize
45899 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45908 \begin_layout Standard
45909 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45912 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45919 \begin_layout Bibliography
45920 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45921 LatexCommand bibitem
45928 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45931 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45936 \begin_inset Newline newline
45940 \begin_inset Flex URL
45943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45945 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45953 \begin_layout Bibliography
45954 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45955 LatexCommand bibitem
45956 key "latexcompanion"
45960 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45962 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
45965 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45968 \begin_layout Bibliography
45969 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45970 LatexCommand bibitem
45975 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45978 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
45981 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45984 \begin_layout Bibliography
45985 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45986 LatexCommand bibitem
45993 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
45996 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45999 \begin_layout Bibliography
46000 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46001 LatexCommand bibitem
46013 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46016 \begin_layout Bibliography
46017 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46018 LatexCommand bibitem
46024 \begin_inset Newline newline
46028 \begin_inset Flex URL
46031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46033 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46041 \begin_layout Bibliography
46042 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46043 LatexCommand bibitem
46049 \begin_inset Newline newline
46053 \begin_inset Flex URL
46056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46058 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46066 \begin_layout Bibliography
46067 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46068 LatexCommand bibitem
46074 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46076 name "Documentation"
46077 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46086 \begin_inset Newline newline
46090 \begin_inset Flex URL
46093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46095 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46103 \begin_layout Bibliography
46104 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46105 LatexCommand bibitem
46111 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46113 name "Documentation"
46114 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46118 how to use the program
46123 \begin_inset Newline newline
46127 \begin_inset Flex URL
46130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46132 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46140 \begin_layout Bibliography
46141 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46142 LatexCommand bibitem
46148 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46150 name "Documentation"
46151 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46160 \begin_inset Newline newline
46164 \begin_inset Flex URL
46167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46169 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46177 \begin_layout Bibliography
46178 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46179 LatexCommand bibitem
46185 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46187 name "Documentation"
46188 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46197 \begin_inset Newline newline
46201 \begin_inset Flex URL
46204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46206 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46214 \begin_layout Bibliography
46215 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46216 LatexCommand bibitem
46222 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46224 name "Documentation"
46225 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46229 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
46230 \begin_inset Newline newline
46234 \begin_inset Flex URL
46237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46239 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46247 \begin_layout Bibliography
46248 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46249 LatexCommand bibitem
46255 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46257 name "Documentation"
46258 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46262 of the LaTeX-package
46267 \begin_inset Index idx
46270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46271 LaTeX-packages ! caption
46277 \begin_inset Newline newline
46281 \begin_inset Flex URL
46284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46286 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46294 \begin_layout Bibliography
46295 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46296 LatexCommand bibitem
46302 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46304 name "Documentation"
46305 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46309 of the LaTeX-package
46314 \begin_inset Index idx
46317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46318 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46324 \begin_inset Newline newline
46328 \begin_inset Flex URL
46331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46333 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46341 \begin_layout Bibliography
46342 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46343 LatexCommand bibitem
46349 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46351 name "Documentation"
46352 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46356 of the LaTeX-package
46361 \begin_inset Index idx
46364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46365 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46371 \begin_inset Newline newline
46375 \begin_inset Flex URL
46378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46380 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46388 \begin_layout Bibliography
46389 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46390 LatexCommand bibitem
46396 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46398 name "Documentation"
46399 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46403 of the LaTeX-package
46408 \begin_inset Index idx
46411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46412 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46418 \begin_inset Newline newline
46422 \begin_inset Flex URL
46425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46427 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46435 \begin_layout Bibliography
46436 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46437 LatexCommand bibitem
46443 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46445 name "Documentation"
46446 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46450 of the LaTeX-package
46455 \begin_inset Index idx
46458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46459 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46465 \begin_inset Newline newline
46469 \begin_inset Flex URL
46472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46474 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46482 \begin_layout Bibliography
46483 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46484 LatexCommand bibitem
46490 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46492 name "Documentation"
46493 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46497 of the LaTeX-package
46502 \begin_inset Index idx
46505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46506 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46512 \begin_inset Newline newline
46516 \begin_inset Flex URL
46519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46521 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46529 \begin_layout Bibliography
46530 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46531 LatexCommand bibitem
46537 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46539 name "Documentation"
46540 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46544 of the LaTeX-package
46549 \begin_inset Index idx
46552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46553 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46559 \begin_inset Newline newline
46563 \begin_inset Flex URL
46566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46568 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46576 \begin_layout Bibliography
46577 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46578 LatexCommand bibitem
46584 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46587 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46591 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46592 \begin_inset Newline newline
46596 \begin_inset Flex URL
46599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46601 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46609 \begin_layout Bibliography
46610 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46611 LatexCommand bibitem
46617 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46620 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46624 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46625 \begin_inset Newline newline
46629 \begin_inset Flex URL
46632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46634 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46642 \begin_layout Bibliography
46643 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46644 LatexCommand bibitem
46650 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46653 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46657 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46658 \begin_inset Newline newline
46662 \begin_inset Flex URL
46665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46667 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46675 \begin_layout Bibliography
46676 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46677 LatexCommand bibitem
46683 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46686 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46690 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46691 \begin_inset Newline newline
46695 \begin_inset Flex URL
46698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46700 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46708 \begin_layout Bibliography
46709 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46710 LatexCommand bibitem
46716 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46719 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46723 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46724 \begin_inset Newline newline
46728 \begin_inset Flex URL
46731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46733 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46741 \begin_layout Bibliography
46742 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46743 LatexCommand bibitem
46749 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46752 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46756 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46757 \begin_inset Newline newline
46761 \begin_inset Flex URL
46764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46766 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46774 \begin_layout Bibliography
46775 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46776 LatexCommand bibitem
46782 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46785 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46789 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46790 \begin_inset Newline newline
46794 \begin_inset Flex URL
46797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46799 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46807 \begin_layout Bibliography
46808 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46809 LatexCommand bibitem
46815 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46818 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46822 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46823 \begin_inset Newline newline
46827 \begin_inset Flex URL
46830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46832 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46840 \begin_layout Bibliography
46841 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46842 LatexCommand bibitem
46848 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46851 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46855 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46856 \begin_inset Newline newline
46860 \begin_inset Flex URL
46863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46865 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46873 \begin_layout Bibliography
46874 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46875 LatexCommand bibitem
46881 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46884 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46888 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46889 \begin_inset Newline newline
46893 \begin_inset Flex URL
46896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46898 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46906 \begin_layout Bibliography
46907 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46908 LatexCommand bibitem
46914 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46917 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46921 about new features in
46926 \begin_inset Newline newline
46930 \begin_inset Flex URL
46933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46935 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46943 \begin_layout Standard
46944 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46978 \begin_inset Note Note
46981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46988 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46989 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46990 bibliography is the second one:
46998 \begin_layout Standard
46999 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47000 LatexCommand bibtex
47001 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47002 options "biblio/alphadin"
47009 \begin_layout Standard
47010 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
47013 \begin_layout Standard
47014 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47015 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47021 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47022 LatexCommand printindex